Compass (2013) - Car JEEP - Free user manual and instructions

USER MANUAL Compass (2013) JEEP

VEHICLESSOLDINCANADA

WithrespecttoanyVehiclesSoldinCanada,thenameFCA USLLCshallbedeemedtobedeletedandthenameFCA CanadaInc. usedinsubstitutiontherefore.

DRIVINGANDALCOHOL

Drunkendrivingisoneofthemostfrequentcausesof accidents.

Yourdrivingabilitycanbeseriouslyimpairedwithblood alcohollevelsfarbelowthelegalminimum.Ifyouare drinking,don'tdrive.Ridewithadesignatednon-drinkingdriver,callacab,afriend,orusepublictransportation.

WARNING!

Drivingafterdrinkingcanleadtoanaccident. Yourperceptionsarelesssharp,yourreflexesare slower,andyourjudgmentisimpairedwhenyou havebeendrinking.Neverdrinkandthendrive.

Thismanualillustratesanddescribestheoperationof featuresandequipmentthatareeitherstandardorop-tionalonthisvehicle. Thismanualmayalsoincludea descriptionoffeaturesandequipmentthatarenolonger availableorwerenotorderedonthisvehicle.Please disregardanyfeaturesandequipmentdescribedinthis manualthatarenotonthisvehicle.

FCAUSLLCreservestherighttomakechangesindesign andspecifications, and/ormakeadditionstoorimprovementstoitsproductswithoutimposinganyobligation uponitselftoinstallthemonproductspreviouslymanufactured.

Copyright©2016FCAUSLLC

SECTION PAGE

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1 INTRODUCTION....3
2 THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE. 9
3 UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE. 103
4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL. 211
5 STARTING AND OPERATING ....
6 WHAT TODO INEMERGENCIES....
7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE....
8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 491
9 IFYOUNEEDCONSUMERASSISTANCE. 4 9 9
10 INDEX

INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS

■INTRODUCTION....4
■ROLLOVER WARNING....4
■HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL....5
■WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS....7

■VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER....7
■VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS....8

4 INTRODUCTION

INTRODUCTION

Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.

This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.

NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it should bestored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold.

When it comes to service, remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfaction.

ROLLOVER WARNING

Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars. It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over when some other vehicles may not.

Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive carefully.

WARNING: HIGHER ROLLOVER RISK Avoid Abrupt Maneuvers and Excessive Speed. Always Buckle Up. See Owner's Manual For Further Information

80bfe0f0

RolloverWarningLabel

Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the U.S. government notes that the universal use of existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by

two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire.

Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle's equipment.

The detailed index at the back of this Owner's Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects.

Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner's Manual:

WATER IN FUEL REAR WINDOW WIPER WINDSHIELD WIPER INTERMITTENT EXTRAORD-SULB FAILURE HIGH BEAM TURN SIGNALS UPPER AIR OUTLET HEATED SEAT LOW DOOR LOCK AGUSTABLE PEDALS ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL ESP BAS ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM/ BRAKE ASSET SYSTEM FUEL REAR WINDOW INTERMITTENT WIPER WINDSHIELD WASHER MASTER LIGHTING SWITCH LOW BEAM KEY ACTNATE (POWER OUTLET) UPPER AND-Lower AIR OUTLET HEATED SEAT HIGH WINDOW LIFT THI PRESSURE MONITOR HILL DESCENT CONTROL BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING P開發 BRAKE FUEL FILL SIDE REAR WINDOW WASHER WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID LEVEL DOME LIGHT FRONT FOG LIGHT HOOD RELEASE LOWER AIR OUTLET RECRECULATION CONVERTIBLE 4 WINDOW DOWN ELECTROIC STABILITY CONTROL AWDI ABS FAILURE OF ATHLOCK WARNING SYSTEM ENGINE OIL REAR WINDOW DEFROST WINDSHIELD ELECTRICALLY HEATER PARK LIGHTS REAR FOG LAMB UFTGATE RELEASE AND LIFTGATE OPEN DEFROST AND LOWER AIR OUTLET VENTSATING FAN WINDOW LOCK ELECTRONIC THIROTILE CONTROL 4WDI BRAKE BATTERY CHARGING HEATED MIRROR WINDSHIELD DEFROST INSTRUMENT PANEL ILLUMINATION SEAT BELT SLIDING DOOR TRUM / DECK RELEASE AIR CONDITIONING CHILD SEAT TETCH ARCHER VOICE RECOCONITION BUTTON TOW/HAUL GLORY FLUG POWER STEERING FLUID WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SIDE AIRSAG AIRSAG SLIDING DOOR EMERGENCY RELEASE HANDLE LIGHTER LOWER ANCHORS AND ETHER FOR CHILDREN (LATCH) UNKNOWN" BUTTON" HAZAKS 4 LOW FOUR WHEEL DRIVE LOW MAFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT TRANS MIL TEMP ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SAS RIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM PASSenger AIRSAG OFF DOOR AJAR CONVERTIBLE TOP DOWN CONVERTIBLE TOP UP HORN SEE OWNERS MANUAL ISO A/C PUSH AIR CONDITIONER OFF ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL/ BRAKE ASSET SYSTEM

010533317

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through the windshield. This number also is stamped into the right front body, on the right front seat crossmember under the carpet and the vehicle registration and title.

Close-up of a car's front and side panels showing a curved lid with an arrow pointing to a feature (no text or symbols)

VehicleIdentificationNumber

8 INTRODUCTION

Interior view of a car showing the dashboard and seatbelt mechanism with a circular inset highlighting a component (no text or symbols)

RightFrontBodyVINLocation

NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

WARNING!

Anymodificationsoralterationstothisvehiclecould seriouslyaffectitsroadworthinessandsafetyand mayleadtoacollisionresultinginseriousinjuryor death.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

■A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS....12

□Ignition Key Removal....1 2

□Locking Doors With A Key. 14

□Key-In-Ignition Reminder....14

■SENTRY KEY®....15

□Replacement Keys....16

□Customer Key Programming....17

□General Information....18

■VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED....18

□To Arm The System....18

□Rearming The System....19

□To Disarm The System....19

□Vehicle Security Alarm Manual Override ..... 1 9

■REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF EQUIPPED....20

□ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate .....21

□Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All First Press....21

□Illuminated Approach — If Equipped . . . . . . . 2 2

10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

□To Lock The Doors And Liftgate....2 2
□Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock....2 2
□Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock/Unlock...23
□Using The Panic Alarm....2 4
□Programming Additional Transmitters. . . . . . . 2 5
□General Information....25
□Transmitter Battery Replacement....25

■REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED....2 6

□How To Use Remote Start....27

■DOOR LOCKS....30

□Manual Door Locks....30
□Power Door Locks....32

□Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors....3 5

■POWER WINDOWS — IF EQUIPPED ..... 3 6

□Power Window Switches....36
□Auto-Down....37
□Window Lockout Switch....38

■LIFTGATE....39
■OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS....40

□Lap/Shoulder Belts 4 4
□Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage ...49
☐Second Row Center Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions....50
□ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure .....53

□ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions .....53
□Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If Equipped....5 4
□Energy Management Feature....5 5
□Seat Belt Pretensioners....5 5
□ Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) . . . . 5 6
□Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert®) 60
□Seat Belt Extender....6 1
□Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . 6 2
□Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags....6 2
□Advanced Front Air Bag Features....6 4

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11

□Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . . 6 9
□Event Data Recorder (EDR)....76
□Child Restraints....77

■ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS....97

■SAFETY TIPS....98

□Transporting Passengers. 98
□Exhaust Gas 98
□Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle....9 9
☐Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle....101

12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS

The authorized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can be used to order duplicate keys. Ask your authorized dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe place.

Top-down illustration of a black automotive key with control buttons and a 'PANIC' label (no text or symbols on the key itself)

021410235

VehicleKey

Ignition Key Removal

1. Place the shift lever in PARK (if equipped with an automatic transmission).
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC (Accessory) position.
3. Push the key and cylinder inward and rotate the key to the LOCK position.
4. Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylinder.

1 2 3 4 020232708

IgnitionSwitchPositions

1—LOCK 3—ON/RUN
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY) 4 — START

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13

NOTE: If you try to remove the key before you place the shift lever in PARK, the key may become trapped temporarily in the ignition switch cylinder. If this occurs, place the shift lever in PARK, rotate the key to the right slightly, then remove the key as described. If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service.

WARNING!

• Beforeexitingavehicle,alwaysapplytheparking brake,shiftthetransmissionintoPARKandremovetheKeyFobfromtheignition.Whenleaving thevehicle,alwayslockyourvehicle.
• Neverleavechildrenaloneinavehicle,orwith accesstoanunlockedvehicle.

(Continued)

14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!(Continued)

• Allowingchildrentobeinavehicleunattendedis dangerousforanumberofreasons.Achildor otherscouldbeseriouslyorfatallyinjured.Childrenshouldbewarnednottotouchtheparking brake,brakepedalortheshiftlever.
• DonotleavetheKeyFobinornearthevehicle, or inalocationaccessibletochildren. Achildcould operatepowerwindows, othercontrols, ormove thevehicle.
• Donotleavechildrenoranimalsinsideparked vehiclesinhotweather.Interiorheatbuild-upmay causeseriousinjuryordeath.

CAUTION!

Alwaysremovethekeyfromtheignitionandlockall doorswhenleavingthevehicleunattended.

Locking Doors With A Key

You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the door, turn the key to the right. To unlock the door, turn the key to the left. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

Key-In-Ignition Reminder

Opening the driver's door when the key is in the ignition and the ignition position is LOCK or ACC, sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key.

NOTE: With the driver's door open and the key in the ignition, the power door locks will not lock and Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter will not function.

SENTRY KEY®

The Sentry Key® Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.

The system uses ignition keys that have an embedded electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if someone uses an invalid key to try to start the engine.

NOTE:A key that has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15

During normal operation, after turning on the ignition switch, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the Vehicle Security Light begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid key to try to start the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds.

If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer.

16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

The SentryKey® Immobilizersystemis not compatible with some after-market remotestartingsystems. Useofthesesystemsmayresultinvehiclestarting problems and loss of security protection.

All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.

Replacement Keys

NOTE: Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle. Once a Sentry Key® is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.

CAUTION!

AlwaysremovetheSentryKeys®fromthevehicle andlockalldoorswhenleavingthevehicleunattended.

At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN). Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer or by following the customer key programming procedure. This procedure consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics. A blank key is one that has never been programmed.

NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.

Customer Key Programming

If you have two valid Sentry Keys®, you can program new Sentry Keys® to the system by performing the following procedure:

1. Cut the additional Sentry Key® Transponder blank(s) to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position for at least three seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds. Then, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first key.
3. Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position within 15 seconds. After 10 seconds, a chime will sound. In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the second key.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

17

1. Insert a blank Sentry Key® into the ignition switch. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position within 60 seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound. In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing. To indicate that programming is complete, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on again for three seconds and then turn off.

The new Sentry Key® is programmed. The Remote KeylessEntry(RKE)transmitterwillalsobeprogrammedduringthisprocedure.

Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys. If you do not have a programmed Sentry Key®, contact your authorized dealer for details.

NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your authorized dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the system's memory. This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be reprogrammed.

18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

All vehicle keys must be taken to an authorized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed.

General Information

The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:

• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference that may be received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED

This Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the doors, liftgate, and ignition switch for unauthorized operation.

When the alarm is activated, the interior switches for door locks are disabled. The Vehicle Security Alarm provides both audio and visual signals, the horn will

sound, the headlights, park lamps and/or turn signals will flash repeatedly for three minutes. If the disturbance is still present (driver's door, passenger door, other doors, ignition) after three minutes, the parking lights and tail lights will flash for an additional 15 minutes.

To Arm The System

1. Remove the key from the ignition switch and get out of the vehicle.
2. Lock the door using either the power door LOCK switch or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and close all doors.
3. The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly for approximately 16 seconds. This shows that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming. During this period, if a door is opened, the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN, or the power door locks are unlocked in any manner, the Vehicle Security

Alarm will automatically disarm. After approximately 16 seconds, the Vehicle Security Light will flash slowly. This shows that the Vehicle Security Alarm is fully armed.

Rearming The System

If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the horn after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself.

To Disarm The System

Press UNLOCK on the RKE transmitter, or insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence, the horn will sound three times and exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the doors. Check the vehicle for tampering. The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm unexpectedly. If you remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the RKE transmitter, once the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed (after 16 seconds), when you pull the door handle to exit, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.

Vehicle Security Alarm Manual Override

The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the doors using the manual door lock plunger.

20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF EQUIPPED

This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.

Illustration of a black automotive key with four buttons and a 'PANIC' label (no additional text or symbols)

021410235

ThreeButtonRKETransmitter

NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked with metal objects.

To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate

Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver's door, or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on.

Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All First Press

This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver's door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the current setting, proceed as follows:

- For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21

- For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the following steps:

1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the UN-LOCK button while still holding the LOCK button.

2. Release both buttons at the same time.

3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key removed.

4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting.

22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm.

Illuminated Approach — If Equipped

This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter. The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the EVIC. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

NOTE: None of the courtesy lights will operate if the dimmer control is in the “defeat” position (extreme downward position), unless the overhead map/reading lights are turned on manually.

To Lock The Doors And Liftgate

Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.

Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock

This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, proceed as follows:

- For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

- For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the following steps:

1. Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds. Then, press the PANIC button while still holding the LOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23

NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm.

Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock/Unlock

This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, proceed as follows:

- For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

- For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the following steps:

1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting.

NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm.

Using The Panic Alarm

To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF, press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on.

The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph (8 km/h) or greater.

NOTE: When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pressing the PANIC button a second time, you may have to move closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of the system.

Programming Additional Transmitters

Refer to Sentry Key® "Customer Key Programming."

If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter, contact your authorized dealer for details.

General Information

This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance, check for these two conditions:

1. Weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected life of a battery is five years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower, airport transmitter, military base, and some mobile or CB radios.

Transmitter Battery Replacement

NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.

26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

1. If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw, remove the screw. With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down, use a flat blade screwdriver to pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the elastomer seal during removal.

3D illustration of a pushpin with an arrow pointing to the handle (no text or symbols)

021432709

SeparatingCaseHalves

1. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
2. To reassemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two halves together.

NOTE: If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw, reinstall and tighten the screw until snug.

REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security. The system has a range of approximately 300 ft (91 m). Obstructions between the vehicle and RKE transmitter may reduce this range.

NOTE:

• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may reduce this range.

How To Use Remote Start

All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start:

• Shift lever in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
  •Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27

• Battery at an acceptable charge level
  •RKE PANIC button not pressed
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
  • Vehicle theft alarm not active

WARNING!

• Donotstartorrunanengineinaclosedgarageor confinedarea.ExhaustgascontainsCarbonMonoxide(CO)whichisodorlessandcolorless.Carbon Monoxideispoisonousandcancauseseriousinjuryordeathwheninhaled.
• KeepRemoteKeylessEntry(RKE)transmitters awayfromchildren.OperationoftheRemoteStart System,windows,doorlocksorothercontrols couldcauseseriousinjuryordeath.

28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

RemoteStartAbortMessageOnElectronicVehicle InformationCenter(EVIC)—IfEquipped

The following messages will display in the EVIC if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely:

• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — L/Gate Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Aborted — System Fault

The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN position.

ToEnterRemoteStart

Press and release the REMOTE START button on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.

NOTE:

• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
• If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote Start will automatically lock the doors.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29

- The engine can be started two consecutive times (two 15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.

Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur:

• The engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500
- Any engine warning lamps come on
- Low Fuel Light turns on
•The hood is opened
• The hazard switch is pressed
• The transmission is moved out of PARK
• The brake pedal is pressed

ToExitRemoteStartModeWithoutDrivingThe Vehicle

Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.

NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request.

ToExitRemoteStartModeAndDriveTheVehicle

Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if equipped). Then, insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON/RUN position.

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position in order to drive the vehicle.

30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

DOOR LOCKS

Manual Door Locks

Use the manual door lock knob to lock the doors from inside the vehicle. If the lock knob is down when the door is closed, the door will lock. Make sure the keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the door.

Interior view of a car showing the left side of the window with a black arrow pointing to a button (no text or symbols visible)

ManualDoorLockKnob

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31

WARNING!

• Forpersonalsecurityandsafetyintheeventofan collision,lockthevehicledoorsasyoudriveas wellaswhenyouparkandleavethevehicle.
• Neverleavechildrenaloneinavehicle,orwith accesstoan unlocked vehicle. Allowingchildrento beinavehicleunattendedisdangerousfora numberofreasons.Achildorotherscouldbe seriouslyorfatallyinjured.Childrenshouldbe warnednottotouchtheparkingbrake,brakepedal ortheshiftlever.
• Allowingchildrentobeinavehicleunattendedis dangerousforanumberofreasons.Achildor otherscouldbeseriouslyorfatallyinjured.Childrenshouldbewarnednottotouchtheparking brake,brakepedalortheshiftlever.

WARNING!(Continued)

- Donotleavethekeyfobinornearthevehicle, or inalocationaccessibletochildren, achildcould operatepowerwindows, othercontrols, ormove thevehicle.

CAUTION!

An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves. Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

(Continued)

32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Power Door Locks

A power door lock switch is located on the driver's and front passenger's door panel. Press this switch to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate.

NOTE: To prevent from locking the key in the vehicle, the power door lock switch will not operate when the key is in the ignition and either front door is open. A chime will sound as a reminder to remove the key.

1 2 021806187

DriverPowerDoorLockSwitch

1 - Unlock 2 - Lock

AutoLockDoors—IfEquipped

The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h).

AutoLockDoorsProgramming

The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled as follows:

• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped/Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the following procedure:
• Close all doors and place the key in the ignition switch.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33

1. Within 15 seconds, cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON/RUN and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position (do not start the engine).
2. Within 30 seconds, press the power door LOCK switch to lock the doors.
3. A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting.

NOTE:

• If you do not hear the chime it means that the system did not enter the programming mode and you will need to repeat the procedure.
• Use the Automatic Door Lock feature in accordance with local laws.

34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

AutomaticUnlockDoorsOnExit

The doors will unlock automatically if:

• The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled.
• The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
• The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
• The driver's door is opened.
  •The doors were not previously unlocked.

AutomaticUnlockDoorsOnExitProgramming

The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled as follows:

- For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped/

Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

- For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the following procedure:

1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
2. Within 15 seconds, cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON/RUN and then back to LOCK five times ending up in the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
3. Within 30 seconds, press the power door UNLOCK switch to unlock the doors.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting.

NOTE:

• If you do not hear the chime it means that the system did not enter the programming mode and you will need to repeat the procedure.
• Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws.

Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors

To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with Child-Protection Door Lock system.

ToEngageOrDisengageTheChild-Protection DoorLockSystem

1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the ignition key into the lock and rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35

1. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.

Close-up of a car interior showing a white arrow pointing to a component, with no visible text or symbols.

Child-ProtectionDoorLockLocation

36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Diagram showing mechanical components with directional arrows and symbols, likely illustrating a motion or movement process in a vehicle or machine.

Child-ProtectionDoorLockFunction

WARNING!

Avoidtrappinganyoneinavehicleinacollision. Rememberthatthereardoorscanonlybeopened fromtheoutsidewhentheChild-Protectionlocksare engaged.

NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged, move the lock knob up (unlocked position), roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle.

POWER WINDOWS — IF EQUIPPED

Power Window Switches

The window controls on the driver's door trim panel control all the door windows. There are single window controls on each passenger door trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows. The window controls will operate when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position.

NOTE:

- For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the power window switches will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37

- For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

WARNING!

Neverleavechildreninvehiclewiththekeyinthe ignitionswitch.Occupants,particularlyunattended children,canbecomeentrappedbythewindows whileoperatingthepowerwindowswitches.Such entrapmentmayresultinseriousinjuryordeath.

Auto 021906196

PowerWindowSwitchLocation

Auto-Down

The driver's door window switch has an Auto-Down feature. Push the window switch past the first detent, release, and the window will go down automatically. To cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch.

38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Window Lockout Switch

The window lockout switch on the driver's door allows you to disable the window control on the other doors. To disable the window controls on the other doors, press the window LOCKOUT switch. To enable the window controls, press the window LOCKOUT switch a second time.

Close-up of a car dashboard with key buttons and a dial, no visible text or symbols

WindowLockoutSwitch

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39

LIFTGATE

NOTE: The key that is used to start the vehicle is also used to lock or unlock the doors and open the liftgate.

To unlock the liftgate, insert the key into the lock and turn it to the right (manual lock models only). The liftgate can also be unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or by activating the power door lock switches located on the front doors. The central locking/unlocking feature (if equipped) can also be activated from the liftgate key cylinder.

Once unlocked, the liftgate can be opened or closed without using the key. To open the liftgate, squeeze the liftgate release and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion.

Rear view of a black SUV with a white arrow pointing to the front grille (no text or symbols visible)

022206146
LiftgateLatchLocation

NOTE:

- In the event of a power malfunction, or the RKE transmitter is inoperative, insert the key into the liftgate lock cylinder and turn to the right (manual lock models only). Using the liftgate handle, pull the lift-gate open with one fluid motion.

40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

- Although the liftgate has no inside release mechanism, the liftgate trim panel includes an opening with a snap-in cap that provides access to release the latch in the event of an electrical system malfunction.

WARNING!

• Drivingwiththeliftgateopencanallowpoisonous exhaustgasesintoyourvehicle.Youandyour passengerscouldbeinjuredbythesefumes.Keep theliftgateclosedwhenyouareoperatingthe vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the lift gate open, makes sure that all windows are closed, and the climate control blowers switch it at high speed. Donot us there circulation mode.

Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.

However, because the gas pressure drops with temperature, it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the liftgate in cold weather.

OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS

Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems:

• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and all passengers
• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenger
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) located on top of the front seats (integrated into the head restraint)

• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) for the driver and passengers seated next to a window

• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) — if equipped

• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering wheel
• Knee bolsters for front seat occupants
• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event
• All seat belt systems (except the driver's) include Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat — if equipped

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41

Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.

If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems. For more information on LATCH, see Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH).

NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on several factors, including the severity and type of collision.

42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:

1. Children12yearsoldandundershouldalwaysride buckledupinarearseat.

WARNING!

Infantsinrearfacingchildrestraintsshouldneverride inthefrontseatofavehiclewithapassengerAdvancedFrontAirBag.Anairbagdeploymentcancause severeinjuryordeathtoinfantsinthatposition.

Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.

If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint. (Refer to "Child Restraints")

You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.

1. Alloccupantsshouldalwaysweartheirlapand shoulderbeltsproperly.
2. Thedriverandfrontpassengerseatsshouldbe movedbackasfaraspracticaltoallowtheAdvanced FrontAirBagsroomtoinflate.
3. Donotleanagainstthedoororwindow.If your vehiclehassideairbags,anddeploymentoccurs,the sideairbagswillinflateforcefullyintothespace betweenyouandthedoor.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43

1. If the air bagsystem in this vehicle need to be modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer Center. Phonenumbers are provided under "If You Need Assistance".

WARNING!

• Relyingontheairbagsalonecouldleadtomore severeinjuriesinacollision.Theairbagsworkwith yourseatbelttorestrainyouproperly.Insome collisions,theairbagswon'tdeployatall.Always wearyourseatbeltseventhoughyouhaveairbags.
• Beingtooclosetothesteeringwheelorinstrument panelduringAdvancedFrontAirBagdeployment couldcauseseriousinjury,includingdeath.Air Bagsneedroomtoinflate.Sitback,comfortably extendingyourarmstoreachthesteeringwheelor instrumentpanel.

WARNING!(Continued)

• SupplementalSideAirBagInflatableCurtain (SABIC)andSeat-MountedSideAirBags(SAB)alsoneedroomtoinflate.Donotleanagainstthe doororwindow.Situprightinthecenterofthe seat.
• Inacollision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckledup. You can strik the interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always besure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly.
• BeingtooclosetotheSupplementalSideAirBag InflatableCurtain(SABIC)and/orSeat-Mounted SideAirBag(SAB)duringdeploymentcouldcause youtobeseverelyinjuredorkilled.

(Continued)

44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen far away from home or on your own street.

Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.

Lap/Shoulder Belts

All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/shoulder belts.

The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions. However, in a collision the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.

WARNING!

• Itisdangeroustorideinacargoarea,insideor outsideofvehicle.Inacollision,peopleridingin theseareasaremorelikelytobeseriouslyinjured orkilled.
• Donotallowpeopleorideinanyareaofyour vehiclethatisnotequippedwithseatsandseat belts.
• Besureeveryoneinyourvehicleisinaseatand usingaseatbeltproperly.
• Wearingaseatbeltincorrectlyisdangerous.Seat beltsaredesignedtogoaroundthelargebonesof yourbody.Thesearethestrongestpartsofyour bodyandcantaketheforcesofacollisionthebest.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Wearingyourbeltinthewrongplacecouldmake yourinjuriesinacollisionmuchworse.Youmight sufferinternalinjuries,oryoucouldevenslideout ofpartofthebelt.Followtheseinstructionstowear yourseatbeltsafelyandtokeepyourpassengers safe,too.
• Twopeopleshouldneverbebeltedintoasingle seatbelt.Peoplebeltedtogethercancrashintoone anotherinacollision,hurtingoneanotherbadly. Neverusealap/shoulderbeltorlapbeltformore thanoneperson,nomatterwhattheirsize.

Lap/ShoulderBeltOperatingInstructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is along side the pillar near the back of your seat. Grasp the latch plate and pull out

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45

the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap.

Interior view of a car showing seatbelt and door, with a black arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols on the main body)

PullingOutTheLatchPlate

1. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."

46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Interior view of a car showing seatbelt and dashboard, with two arrows pointing to the side of the seat (no text or symbols present)

InsertingLatchPlateIntoBuckle

WARNING!

• Abeltbuckledintothewrongbucklewillnotprotect youproperly. Thelapportioncouldridetoothighon yourbody,possiblycausinginternalinjuries.Alwaysbuckleyourbeltintothebucklenearestyou.
• Abelthtatistooloosewillnotprotectyouproperly.Inasuddenstopyoucouldmovetoofar forward,increasingthepossibilityofinjury.Wear yourseatbeltsnugly.
• Abelthatiswornunderyourarmisdangerous. Yourbodycouldstriketheinsidesurfacesofthe vehicleinacollision,increasingheadandneck injury.Abeltwornunderthearmcancauseinternal injuries.Ribsaren'tasstrongassshoulderbones. Wearthebeltoveryourshouldersothatyourstrongestboneswilltaketheforceinacollision.

(Continued)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47

WARNING!(Continued)

- Ashoulderbeltplacedbehindyouwillnotprotect youfrominjuryduringacollision.Youaremore likelytohityourheadinacollisionifyoudonot wearyourshoulderbelt.Thelapandshoulderbelt aremeanttobeusedtogether.

1. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.

Interior view of a car showing seatbelt and seatbelt buckle (no text or symbols visible)

PositioningLapBelt

48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

• Alapbeltworntoohighcanincreasetheriskof internalinjuryinacollision.Thebeltforceswon't beatthestronghipandpelvicbones,butacross yourabdomen.Alwayswearthelapbeltaslowas possibleandkeepitsnug.

• Atwistedbeltmaynotprotectyouproperly.Ina collision,itcouldevencutintoyou.Besurethebelt isstraight.Ifyoucan'tstraightenabeltinyour vehicle,takeittoyourauthorizeddealerimmediatelyandhaveitfixed.

• Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt.

• To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully.

WARNING!

Afrayedortornbeltcouldripapartinacollisionand leaveyouwithnoprotection.Inspectthebeltsystem periodically,checkingforcuts,frays,orlooseparts. Damagedpartsmustbereplacedimmediately.Do notdisassembleormodifythesystem.Seatbelt assembliesmustbereplacedafteracollisionifthey havebeendamaged(bentretractor,tornwebbing, etc.).

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage

In the front seat, the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck. Push the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and move it up or down to the position that fits you best.

NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position without pressing the release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position.

Interior view of a car seatbelt with a double-headed arrow indicating vertical motion (no text or symbols)

AdjustableAnchorage

As a guide, if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position. When you release the anchorage, try to move it down to make sure that it is locked in position.

50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

In the rear seat, move toward the center of the seat to position the belt away from your neck.

Second Row Center Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

The second row center lap/shoulder belt features a three-point seat belt with a mini-latch and buckle, which allows the shoulder belt to detach from the lower anchor when the seat is folded. The mini-buckle and shoulder belt can then be stored out of the way in the right side trim panel for added convenience.

1. Remove the mini-latch and regular latch from its stowed position in the right rear side trim panel.

Mechanical component diagram showing a belt buckle with bidirectional arrow indicating movement (no text or symbols)

Mini-LatchStowage

1. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the belt over the seat.
2. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the right head restraint.

Interior view of a car showing rear seats and passenger seat compartments (no text or symbols visible)

RoutingTheRearCenterShoulderBelt

1. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear a "click."

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51

1. Sit back in the seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap.
2. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."

Close-up of a car seatbelt buckle assembly (no text or symbols visible)

ConnectingMini-LatchToBuckle

52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

1. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on the lap belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.

Close-up of a mechanical joint or fracture surface with two arrows pointing to specific features (no text or symbols present)

RearCenterSeatBeltBuckled

1. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt.
2. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.

Medical illustration showing a hand adjusting a car seatbelt with an arrow pointing to the seat (no text or symbols present)

DetachingMini-LatchAndBuckle

1. To disengage the mini-latch from the mini-buckle for storage, insert the regular latch plate into the black button on the top of the mini-buckle. The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully. Insert the mini-latch plate into the slot provided in the trim panel.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure

Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/shoulder belt.

1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53

1. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate.
2. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing.

Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) which are used to secure a child restraint system. For additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of feature for each seating position.

54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

	DriverCenterPassenger
First Row N	/A N/A ALR
Second Row	ALR ALR	ALR

•N/A — Not Applicable
- ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor

If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage:

Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant's mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant's mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."

Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If Equipped

In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is available on all passenger-seating positions with a combination lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with this feature. Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat.

HowToEngageTheAutomaticLockingMode

1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.

2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted.

3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.

HowToDisengageTheAutomaticLockingMode

Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.

WARNING!

• Thebeltandretractorassemblymustbereplacedif theseatbeltassemblyAutomaticLockingRetractor (ALR)featureoranyotherseatbeltfunctionisnot workingproperlywhencheckedaccordingtothe proceduresintheServiceManual.
• Failuretoreplacethebeltandretractorassembly couldincreaseetheriskofinjuryincollisions.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55

Energy Management Feature

This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on collision.

This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant's chest.

Seat Belt Pretensioners

The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints.

56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly.

The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.

Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)

These head restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and trim, the back half being decorative plastic.

HowTheActiveHeadRestraints(AHR)Work

The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear impact requires deployment, both the driver and front passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.

When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant's head and the AHR. This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts.

NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may not deploy in the event of a front or side impact. However if during a front impact, a secondary rear impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the severity and type of the impact.

Diagram of a car seat with numbered parts labeled 1 to 4

022607508

ActiveHeadRestraint(AHR)Components

1 — Head Restraint Front Half (Soft Foam and Trim)

3 — Head Restraint Back Half (Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)

2 — Seatback 4 — Head Restraint Guide Tubes

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57

CAUTION!

Allooccupants, including the driver, should not operate vehicle or sit in a vehicle's seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize risk of neck injury in the event of a collision.

NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and positioning the head restraint, refer to "Adjusting Active Head Restraints" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle".

58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

ResettingActiveHeadRestraints(AHR)

If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a collision, you must reset the head restraint on the driver's and front passenger seat. You can recognize when the Active Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they have moved forward (as shown in step three of the resetting procedure).

1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.

Illustration of a person sitting in a car seat with hands on their head, no text or symbols present

HandPositioningPointsOnAHR

1. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at a comfortable position.

2. Pull downthen rearwardtowards the rear of the vehicle then downto engage the locking mechanism.

1 2

022607497

1 — Downward Movement
2 — Rearward Movement

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59

Mechanical component diagram showing a curved arm with a handle and a numbered arrow pointing to the top part (no text or symbols present)

022607757

3 — Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism

60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

1. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock into the back decorative plastic half.

3D rendered image of a car seat with neck and side arm (no text or symbols)

AHRInResetPosition

022607494

NOTE:

- If you have difficulties or problems resetting the Active Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer.

- For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized dealer.

Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert®)

BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind the driver and front passenger (if equipped with front passenger BeltAlert®) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are fastened.

The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins after the vehicle speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened. After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61

Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occupants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provide both audio and visual notification.

The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not active when the front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert® may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.

BeltAlert® can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert®.

NOTE: Although BeltAlert® has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver's or front passenger (if equipped with BeltAlert®) seat belt remains unfastened.

Seat Belt Extender

If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough. When it is not required, remove the extender and store it.

62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

Usingaseatbeltextenderwhennotneededcan increasetheriskofinjuryinacollision.Onlyuse whentheseatbeltisnotlongenoughwhenitisworn lowandsnugandintherecommendedseatingpositions.Removeandstoretheextenderwhennot needed.

Seat Belts And Pregnant Women

We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe.

Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible. Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision.

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags

This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver's Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger's Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.

Top-down diagram of a car dashboard with labeled parts including steering wheel, dashboard, and air conditioners.

AdvancedFrontAirBagAndKneeBolsterLocations

1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags

2 — Knee Bolster

NOTE: The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags are certified to new Federal regulations.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63

The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation that are based on the severity and type of collision.

This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position.

This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags.

This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front, and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC are located above the side windows. The trim covering the side air bags is labeled SRS AIRBAG.

64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle may be equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced protection for an occupant during a side impact. The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are located in the outboard side of the front seats.

NOTE:

• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately.

AirBagSystemComponents

Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components:

•Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light

•Steering Wheel and Column
- Instrument Panel
- Knee Impact Bolster
- Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
- Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
- Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch, and Seat Track Position Sensors

Advanced Front Air Bag Features

The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65

determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact sensors.

The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions.

WARNING!

• Noobjectsshouldbeplacedoverorneartheairbag ontheinstrumentpanel, becauseanysuchobjects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the airbag to inflate.
• Donotputanythingonoraroundtheairbagcovers orattempttoopenthemmanually.Youmaydamage theairbagsandyoucouldbeinjuredbecausetheair bagsmaynolongerbefunctional.Theprotective

WARNING!(Continued)

coversfortheairbagcushionsaredesignedtoopen onlywhentheairbagsareinflating.

• Donotdrill, cutortamperwiththekneebolsterin anyway.
• Donotmountanyaccessoriestothekneebolster suchasalarmlights, stereos, citizenbandradios, etc.

SupplementalSeat-MountedSideAirBags(SAB)

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant during a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air bag label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats.

(Continued)

66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

SRS AIR BAG 022610242

SupplementalSeat-MountedSideAirBagLabel

When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat's trim cover. Each air bag deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air bag only.

SupplementalSideAirBagInflatableCurtain (SABIC)

SABIC air bags may offer side-impact and vehicle roll-over protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure. Each air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side-impact head injuries. The SABIC air bags deploy downward, covering both windows on the impact side.

Interior view of a car showing a seatbelt and a vehicle with a logo, no readable text or symbols present.

SideCurtainAirBagLabelLocation

NOTE:

- Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners and/or SAB and SABIC curtains on both sides of the vehicle may deploy.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67

• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain and/or Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed.

The system includes side impact sensors that are calibrated to deploy the side air bags during impacts that require air bag occupant protection.

WARNING!

- Yourvehicleisequippedwithleftandright SABIC,donotstackluggageorothercargouphigh enoughtoblockthelocationoftheSABIC.The areawherethesidecurtainairbagislocated shouldremainfreefromanyobstructions.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Donotuseaccessoryseatcoversorplaceobjects betweenyouandtheSAB;theperformancecould beadverselyaffectedand/orobjectscouldbe pushedintoyou,causingseriousinjury.
• YourvehicleisequippedwithSABICairbags,do nothaveanyaccessoryitemsinstalledwhichwill altertheroof,includingaddingasunrooftoyour vehicle.Donotaddroofracksthatrequirepermanentattachments(boltsorscrews)forinstallation onthevehicleroof.Donotdrillintotheroofofthe vehicleforanyreason.

SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system. Occupants, including children who are up against or very close to SAB or SABIC air bags can be seriously injured or killed. Occupants, especially children, should not lean on or sleep against the door, side

windows, or area where the SAB or SABIC air bags inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.

Always sit upright as possible with your back against the seat back, use the seat belts properly, and use the appropriate sized child restraint, infant restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child.

KneeImpactBolsters

The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and front passengers, and position front occupants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bags.

Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front Air Bags work with the knee impact bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger. Side air bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection.

Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls

OccupantRestraintController(ORC)

The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle.

The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required. Based on the impact sensor's signals, a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air bags, Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags, and front seat belt pretensioners, as required, depending on several factors, including the severity and type of impact.

Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on several factors, including the severity and type of collision. Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69

The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other hand, depending on the type and location of impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration.

The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions. Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision.

Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed.

Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, away from an inflating air bag.

70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the OFF position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.

The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.

Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition is first turned on. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup.

It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.

WARNING!

IgnoringtheAirBagWarningLightinyourinstrumentpanelcouldmeanyouwon'thavetheairbags toprotectyouinacollision.Ifthelightdoesnotcome onasabulbcheckwhentheignitionisfirstturned on,staysonafteryoustartthevehicle,orifitcomes onasyoudrive,haveanauthorizeddealerservicethe airbagsystemimmediately.

DriverAndPassengerAdvancedFrontAirBag InflatorUnits

The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71

When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates are possible, based on several factors, including the collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.

The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.

SupplementalSeat-MountedSideAirBag(SAB) InflatorUnits

The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) are designed to activate only in certain side collisions.

The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of collision.

Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This especially applies to children.

72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

SupplementalSideAirBagInflatableCurtain (SABIC)InflatorUnits

During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.

A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30 milliseconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag inflates. This especially applies to children. The side curtain air bag is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when it is inflated.

Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed.

NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SAB and SABIC air bags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle.

FrontAndSideImpactSensors

In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events.

EnhancedAccidentResponseSystem

In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if the communication network remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:

- Cut off fuel to the engine.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed.
• Unlock the doors automatically.

In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System functions after an event, the ignition switch must be changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF.

IfADeploymentOccurs

The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment.

NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system.

If you do have a collision, which deploys the air bags, any or all of the following may occur:

- The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if you haven't healed significantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately.

- As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or

74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer's instructions for cleaning.

Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will not be in place to protect you.

WARNING!

Deployedairbagsandseatbeltpretensionerscannot protectyouinanothercollision.Havetheairbags, seatbeltpretensioners,andthefrontseatbeltretractorassembliesreplacedbyanauthorizeddealerimmediately.Also,havetheOccupantRestraintControllerSystemservicedaswell.

MaintainingYourAirBagSystem

WARNING!

• Modificationstoanypartoftheairbagsystem couldcauseittofailwhenyouneedit.Youcould beinjurediftheairbagsystemisnotthereto protectyou.Donotmodifythecomponentsor wiring,includingaddinganykindofbadgesor stickerstothesteeringwheelhubtrimcoverorthe upperrightsideoftheinstrumentpanel.Donot modifythefrontbumper,vehiclebodystructure,or addaftermarketsidestepsorrunningboards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bags system yourself. Besuretotellanyonewho works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Donotattempttomodifyanypartofyourairbag system. The airbag may inflate accidentally or may

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

notfunctionproperlyifmodificationsaremade. Takeyourvehicletoanauthorizeddealerforany airbagsystemservice.Ifyourseat,includingyour trimcoverandcushion,needstobeservicedinany way(includingremovalorloosening/tighteningof seatattachmentbolts),takethevehicletoyour authorizeddealer.Onlymanufacturerapproved seataccessoriesmaybeused.Ifitisnecessaryto modifytheairbagsystemforpersonswithdisabilities,contactyourauthorizeddealer.

AirBagWarningLight

You will want to have the air bags ready to inflate for your protection in a collision. The Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

with air bag system electrical components. While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.

• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving.

NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the

76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

proper air bag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good.

Event Data Recorder (EDR)

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

NOTE:EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Child Restraints

Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times, including babies and children. Every state in the United States, and every Canadian province, requires that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.

Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.

There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner's Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it.

NOTE: For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org or call 1-866-SEATCHECK. Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada's website for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm

WARNING!

Inacollision, an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The forcerequired to holdevenan infant on your lap could become so great that you could no hold the child, no matter how strongly you are. The child and others could be badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in proper restraint for the child's size.

SummaryOfRecommendationsForRestrainingChildrenInVehicles

	ChildSize,Height,WeightorAge	RecommendedType ofChildRestraint
Infants and Toddlers	Children who are two years old or younger and who have not reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint	Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years old or who have out-grown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint		Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness, facing forward in the rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have out-grown their forward-facing child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle's seat belt		Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints	Children 12 years old or younger, who have out-grown the height or weight limit of their booster seat	Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle

InfantsAndChildRestraints

Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.

The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79

reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat.

WARNING!

• Neverplacearearfacinginfantseatinfrontofan airbag.AdeployingpassengerAdvancedFrontAir Bagcancausedeathorseriousinjurytoachild12 yearsoryounger,includingachildinarearward facinginfantseat.
• Onlyusearearward-facingchildrestraintinarear seat.

OlderChildrenAndChildRestraints

Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who

have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat.

All children whose weight or height is above the forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle's seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle's seat cushion while the child's back is against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt.

WARNING!

• Improperinstallationcanleadtofailureofan infantorchildrestraint.Itcouldcomelooseina collision.Thechildcouldbebadlyinjuredor killed.Followthechildrestraintmanufacturer's directionsexactlywheninstallinganinfantor childrestraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Don't leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or seat backs and cause serious personal injury.

ChildrenTooLargeForBoosterSeats

Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle's seat belt alone:

1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child's knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child's shoulder between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the child's thighs and not their stomach?

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81

1. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?

If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back.

82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

RecommendationsForAttachingChildRestraints

RestraintTypeCombined	Weightofthe Child+Child Restraint	Useanyattachmentmethodshownwithan“X”Below
		LATCH-LowerAnchors Only	SeatBeltOnly	LATCH-LowerAnchors+TopTether Anchor	SeatBelt+Top TetherAnchor
Rear-Facing Child Restraint	Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg)	X	X
Rear-Facing Child Restraint	More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg)		X
Forward-Facing Child Restraint	Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg)			X	X
Forward-Facing Child Restraint	More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg)				X

LowerAnchorsandTethersforChildren(LATCH) RestraintSystem

Anchor. Tether. LATCH

The next generation of child safety.

022668173

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83

Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle's seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the following table for more information.

84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE LATCHPositionsForInstallingChildRestraintsIn ThisVehicle

Top-down architectural rendering of a car with four windows and three side-mounted icons (no text or symbols)

022668566

Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85

What is the weight limit (child's weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint?	65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use	the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint?	No Do not use	the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the inner LATCH lower anchorages?	Yes You can	install child restraints with flexible lower anchors in the center position. The inner anchorages are 15.5 inches (390 mm) apart. Do not install child restraints with rigid lower anchors in the center position.

86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH anchorage?	No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat?	Yes The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more information.
Can the head restraints be removed? No

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87

LocatingTheLATCHAnchorage

The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback. They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.

Interior view of a car showing seatbelt and seatbelt connector (no text or symbols visible)

RearSeatLATCHAnchorage

88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

LocatingTheLATCHAnchorage

In addition, there are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located on the back of the seat.

LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.

CenterSeatLATCH

Do not install child restraints with rigid lower attachments in the center seating position. Only install this type of child restraint in the outboard seating positions. Child restraints with flexible, webbing mounted lower attachments can be installed in any rear seating position.

WARNING!

Neverusethesameloweranchoragetoattachmore thanonechildrestraint.IfyouareinstallingLATCH-compatiblechildrestraintsnexttoeachother,you mustusetheseatbeltforthecenterposition.Youcan thenuseeithertheLATCHanchorsorthevehicle's seatbeltforinstallingchildseatsintheoutboard positions.Pleasereferto"InstallingTheLATCH-CompatibleChildRestraintSystem"fortypicalinstallationinstructions.

Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here.

ToInstallALATCH-compatibleChildRestraint

1. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the instructions below. See the section "Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt" to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to get a better fit.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89

1. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating position.
2. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the top tether anchorage. See the section "Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage" for directions to attach a tether anchor.
3. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
4. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.

90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

HowToStowAnUnusedALRSeatbelt

When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the child's reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seatbelt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them.

WARNING!

Improperinstallationofachildrestrainttothe LATCHanchoragescanleadtofailureofthere- straint.Thechildcouldbebadlyinjuredorkilled. Followthechildrestraintmanufacturer'sdirections exactlywheninstallinganinfantorchildrestraint.

InstallingChildRestraintsUsingTheVehicleSeat Belt

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91

make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor. For additional information on ALR, refer to the "Automatic Locking Mode" description under "Occupant Restraints." The cinching latch plate is designed to hold the lap portion of the seatbelt tight when webbing is pulled tight and straight through a child restraint's belt path. Please see the table below and the following sections for more information about both types of seat belts.

Lap/ShoulderBeltSystemsforInstallingChild RestraintsinthisVehicle

ALR ALR ALR ALR

022668725

92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

What is the weight limit (child's weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint?	Weight limit of the Child Restraint	Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat?	Yes Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be removed? No
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint?	Yes In positions with cinching latch plates (CINCH), the buckle stalk may be twisted up to 3 full turns. Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor.

InstallingAChildRestraintwithaSwitchable AutomaticLockingRetractor(ALR)

1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93

back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.

1. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
2. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.
3. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap. Refer to "Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) Restraint System" for directions to attach a tether anchor.

94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

1. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.

Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.

Installing AChildRestraint With ACinching LatchPlate (CINCH)—If Equipped

1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to get a better fit.

2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.

3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."

4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.
5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap. Refer to "Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) Restraint System" for directions to attach a tether anchor.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.

Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.

If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out, away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4 to 6, above, to complete the installation of the child restraint.

If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn the buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate into the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child restraint installation tight, try a different seating position.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95

InstallingChildRestraintsUsingTheTopTether Anchorage

1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage. You may need to move the seat forward to provide better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage for that seating position (see the charts above), move the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat, routing it over the center of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.

96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Interior view of a car showing rear seats and seatbelt rack (no text or symbols visible)

TetherAnchorageLocations

1. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.

WARNING!

- Anincorrectlyanchoredtetherstrapcouldleadto increasedheadmotionandpossibleinjurytothe child.Useonlytheanchoragepositiondirectly behindthechildseattosecureachildrestrainttop tetherstrap.

- If your vehicle is equipped with a split rearseat, makes sure the ether strap does not slip into the opening between these at backs as you remove slack in the strap.

TransportingPets

Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision.

Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

A long break-in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.

Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.

While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.

The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.

CAUTION!

NeveruseNon-DetergentOilorStraightMineralOil intheengineordamagemayresult.

NOTE:A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.

98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

SAFETY TIPS

Transporting Passengers

NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.

WARNING!

• Donotleavechildrenoranimalsinsideparked vehiclesinhotweather.Interiorheatbuild-upmay causeseriousinjuryordeath.
• Itisextremelydangeroustorideinacargoarea, insideoroutsideofvehicle.Inacollision,people ridingintheseareasaremorelikelytobeseriously injuredorkilled.
• Donotallowpeopletorideinanyareaofyour vehiclethatisnotequippedwithseatsandseatbelts.
• Besureeveryoneinyourvehicleisinaseatand usingaseatbeltproperly.

Exhaust Gas

WARNING!

Exhaustgasescaninjureorkill. They contain carbon monoxide(CO), which is colorless and odorless.

Breathingitcanmakeyouunconsciousandcan eventuallypoisonyou.Toavoidbreathing(CO), followthesesafetytips:

• Donotruntheengineinaclosedgarageorin confinedareasanylongerthanneededtomove yourvehicleinoroutofthearea.
• If you are required to drivewith the trunk/lift gate open, makes sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is high speed. DONOT use there circulation mode.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

- Ifitisnecessarytositinaparkedvehiclewiththe engineerunning,adjustyourheatingorcooling controlstoforceoutsideairintothevehicle.Setthe blowerathighspeed.

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.

Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99

Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle

SeatBelts

Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.

Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition, replace the belt.

100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

AirBagWarningLight

The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

Defroster

Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.

FloorMatSafetyInformation

Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.

WARNING!

Pedalsthatcannotmovefreelycancauselossof vehiclecontrolandincreasetheriskofseriouspersonalinjury.

• Alwaysmakesurethatfloormatsareproperly attachedtothefloormatfasteners.
- Neverplaceorinstallfloormatsorotherfloorcoveringsinthevehiclethatcannotbeproperlysecuredto preventthemfrommovingandinterferingwiththe pedalsortheabilitytocontrolthevehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Neverputfloormatsorotherfloorcoveringsontop ofalreadyinstalledfloormats.Additionalfloor matsandothercoveringswillreducethesizeofthe pedalareaandinterferewiththepedals.
• Checkmountingofmatsonaregularbasis.Always properlyreinstallandsecurefloormatsthathave beenremovedforcleaning.
• Alwaysmakesurethatobjectscannotfallintothe driverfootwellwhilethevehicleismoving.Objectscanbecometrappedunderthebrakepedal andacceleratorpedalcausingalossofvehicle control.
• Ifrequired,mountingpostsmustbeproperlyinstalled,ifnotequippedfromthefactory.

WARNING!(Continued)

Failuretoproperlyfollowfloormatinstallationor mountingcancauseinterferencewiththebrake pedalandacceleratorpedaloperationcausinglossof controlofthevehicle.

Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle

Tires

Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges. Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.

(Continued)

102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Lights

Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.

DoorLatches

Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.

FluidLeaks

Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be located and corrected immediately.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

■MIRRORS....108

□Inside Day/Night Mirror....108

□ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . .109

□Outside Mirror — Driver Side . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 0

□Outside Mirror — Passenger Side ..... 1 1 0

□Folding Outside Mirrors....1 1 0

□Power Mirrors....1 1 0

□Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 1

□Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 2

□Sun Visor Sliding Feature....1 1 2

■Uconnect® Phone — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . 1 1 2

□Operation....1 1 4

□ Phone Call Features....122

□ Uconnect® Phone Features....125

□Advanced Phone Connectivity....130

□Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect® Phone....132

□General Information....143

■ VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED .....143

□Voice Command System Operation .....143

104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

□Commands....145
□Voice Training....148

□Reclining Rear Seat — If Equipped .....162
■TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD. . . . . . . .162

■SEATS

□Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
□Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
□Manual Front Seat Adjustment....152
□Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped....153
□Manual Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
□Driver's Seatback Recline .....155
□Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
□Head Restraints....157
□Folding Rear Seat....160

■LIGHTS....164

□Multifunction Lever....164
□Headlights And Parking Lights....165
□Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . .165
□Lights-On Reminder....166
□Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
□Turn Signals....167
□High/Low Beam Switch....167
□Flash-To-Pass....168
□Instrument Panel Dimming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
□Map/Reading Lights....169

■WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS .....170

□Windshield Wiper Operation....171

□Intermittent Wiper System.....172

□Windshield Washers....172

□Mist Feature....173

■ TILT STEERING COLUMN .....174

■ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED....175

□To Activate....176

□To Set A Desired Speed....176

□To Deactivate....177

□To Resume Speed....177

□To Vary The Speed Setting .....177

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105

□To Accelerate For Passing....178

■GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .178

□Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®....180

□Programming A Rolling Code .....180

□Programming A Non-Rolling Code .....182

□Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .....184

□Using HomeLink®. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

□Security....185

□Troubleshooting Tips....186

□General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

■POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED .....188

□Opening Sunroof — Express .....189

106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

□Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode .....189
□Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
□Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode .....189
□Pinch Protect Feature....189
□Venting Sunroof — Express .....190
□Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
□Wind Buffeting....190
□Sunroof Maintenance....190
□Ignition Off Operation....191

■ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS....191

■POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED. . . . . . . . 194

■CUPHOLDERS....196

■STORAGE....197

□Glove Compartment And Storage Bin . . . . . . .197

□Door Storage. 198

■CONSOLE FEATURES....199

■CARGO AREA FEATURES....200

□Cargo Light/Removable Self-Recharging Flashlight....200

□Cargo Cover....201

□Removable Load Floor....203

□Cargo Tie-Down Loops....204

□Fold Down Speakers — If Equipped . . . . . . . .205

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107

■REAR WINDOW FEATURES....206

□Rear Window Wiper/Washer....206

□Rear Window Defroster....207

■ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . .208

108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

MIRRORS

Inside Day/Night Mirror

A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical mirror adjustment. Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window.

Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position (toward the rear of vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward the windshield).

Front view of a car rear mirror with an arrow pointing to the side (no text or symbols on the mirror itself)

InsideDay/NightMirror

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109

Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped

This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right of the button does not illuminate.

NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is moving in reverse.

Front view of a car rearview mirror with a black arrow pointing upward (no text or symbols)

030406002

AutomaticDimmingMirror

CAUTION!

Toavoiddamagetothemirrorduringcleaning,never sprayanycleaningsolutiondirectlyontothemirror. Applythesolutionontoacleanclothandwipethe mirrorclean.

110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Outside Mirror — Driver Side

Adjust the flat outside mirror so you can just see the side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the vehicle with your head close to the door glass.

Outside Mirror — Passenger Side

Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the vehicle with your head close to the center of the vehicle.

WARNING!

Vehiclesandotherobjectsseeninthepassengerside convexmirrorwilllooksmallerandfartheraway thantheyreallyare.Relyingtoomuchonyour passengersidemirrorcouldcauseyoutocollidewith anothervehicleorotherobject.Useyourinside mirrorwhenjudgingthesizeordistanceofvehicle seeninthisconvexmirror.

Folding Outside Mirrors

The outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved, manually, either forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have three detent positions; full forward, full rearward and normal.

Power Mirrors

The power mirror control is located on the driver's door trim panel.

Close-up of a car dashboard control panel with buttons and a scroll wheel (no visible text or symbols)

PowerMirrorControl

To adjust a mirror, turn the control wand toward the left or right mirror positions indicated. Tilt the control wand in the direction you want the mirror to move.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111

When you are finished adjusting the mirror, turn the control to the center position to prevent accidentally moving a mirror.

Heated Mirrors — If Equipped

These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster. Refer to "Rear Window Features" in "Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle" for further information.

112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped

To use the vanity mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward.

Interior view of a car dashboard with a directional arrow and label (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

VanityMirror

Sun Visor Sliding Feature

The sun visors may be extended out to provide more coverage of the side glass.

Uconnect® Phone — IF EQUIPPED

Uconnect® Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-vehicle communications system. Uconnect® Phone allows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone using simple voice commands (e.g., "Call" ... "Mike" ... "Work" or "Dial" ..."248-555-1212"). Your mobile phone's audio is transmitted through your vehicle's audio system; the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect® Phone.

NOTE:The Uconnect® Phone requires a mobile phone equipped with the Bluetooth® "Hands-Free Profile", Version 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect® website for supported phones.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113

For Uconnect® Customer Support: U.S. residents - visit www.UconnectPhone.com or call 1-877-855-8400. Canadian Residents - visit www.UconnectPhone.com or call, 1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French).

Uconnect® Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system's microphone for private conversation.

The Uconnect® Phone is driven through your Bluetooth® "Hands-Free Profile" mobile phone. Uconnect® features Bluetooth® technology - the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station, so Uconnect® Phone works no matter where you stow your mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle's Uconnect® Phone. The Uconnect® Phone allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone can be used with the system at a time. The system is available in English, Spanish, or French languages.

WARNING!

Anyvoicecommandedsystemshouldbeusedonlyinsafedrivingconditionsfollowingallapplicablelaws,includinglawsregardingphoneuse.Yourattentionshouldbefocusedonsafelyoperatingthevehicle.Failureretodosomayresultinacollisioncausingseriousinjuryordeath.

Uconnect®PhoneButton

The radio or steering wheel controls (if equipped) will contain the two control buttons (Uconnect® Phone 📋 button and Voice Command ⬆VR button) that will enable you to

114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

access the system. When you press the button you will hear the word Uconnect® followed by a BEEP. The beep is your signal to give a command.

VoiceCommandButton

Actual button location may vary with the radio. The individual buttons are described in the "Operation" section.

The Uconnect® Phone can be used with any Hands-Free Profile certified Bluetooth® mobile phone. See the Uconnect® website for supported phones. Refer to your mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for details.

The Uconnect® Phone is fully integrated with the vehicle's audio system. The volume of the Uconnect® Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right switch), if so equipped.

The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the Uconnect® Phone such as "CELL" or caller ID on certain radios.

Operation

Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect® Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect® Phone menu structure. Voice commands are required after most Uconnect® Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options.

• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the beep, which follows the "Ready" prompt or another prompt.
• For certain operations, compound commands can be used. For example, instead of saying "Setup" and then "Pair a Device", the following compound command can be said: "Pair a Bluetooth® Device".

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115

- For each feature explanation in this section, only the compound form of the voice command is given. You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it. For example, you can use the compound form voice command "Phonebook New Entry", or you can break the compound form command into two voice commands: "Phonebook" and "New Entry". Please remember, the Uconnect® Phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/meters away from you.

VoiceCommandTree

Refer to "Voice Tree" in this section.

HelpCommand

If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to know your options at any prompt, say "Help" following the beep. The Uconnect® Phone will play some of the options at any prompt if you ask for help.

To activate the Uconnect® Phone, simply press the button and follow the audible prompts for directions. Uconnect® Phone sessions begin with a press of the button on the radio control head.

CancelCommand

At any prompt, after the beep, you can say "Cancel" and you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu.

Pair(Link)Uconnect®PhoneToAMobilePhone

To begin using your Uconnect® Phone, you must pair your compatible Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone.

To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference your mobile phone Owner's Manual. The Uconnect® website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.

116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The following are general phone to Uconnect® Phone pairing instructions:

• Press the 📊 button to begin.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Device Pairing".
• When prompted, after the beep, say "Pair a Device" and follow the audible prompts.
• You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN), which you will later need to enter into your mobile phone. You can enter any four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process.
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to give the Uconnect® Phone a name for your mobile phone. Each mobile phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name.

- You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a priority level between one and seven, with one being the highest priority. You can pair up to seven mobile phones to your Uconnect® Phone. However, at any given time, only one mobile phone can be in use, connected to your Uconnect® System. The priority allows the Uconnect® Phone to know which mobile phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the Uconnect® Phone will use the priority three mobile phone when you make a call. You can select to use a lower priority mobile phone at any time (refer to “Advanced Phone Connectivity” in this section).

DialBySayingANumber

• Press the 📞 button to begin.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Dial".
• The system will prompt you to say the number you want to call.
• For example, you can say "234-567-8901".
• The Uconnect® Phone will confirm the phone number and then dial. The number will appear in the display of certain radios.

CallBySayingAName

• Press the 📞 button to begin.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Call".

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117

• The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say the name of the person you want to call. For example, you can say "John Doe", where John Doe is a previously stored name entry in the Uconnect® phonebook or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a name in the phonebook, refer to "Add Names to Your Uconnect® Phonebook".
• The Uconnect® system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number, which may appear in the display of certain radios.

AddNamesToYourUconnect®Phonebook

NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect® Phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.

- Press the 📞 button to begin.

118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Phonebook New Entry".
• When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of long names helps the Voice Command and it is recommended. For example, say "Robert Smith" or "Robert" instead of "Bob".
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g., "Home", "Work", "Mobile", or "Other"). This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone-book entry, if desired.
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding.

After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu.

The Uconnect® Phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations. Each language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible only in that language. In addition, if equipped and supported by your phone, Uconnect® Phone automatically downloads your mobile phone's phonebook.

PhonebookDownload-AutomaticPhonebook TransferFromMobilePhone

If equipped and specifically supported by your phone, Uconnect® Phone automatically downloads names (text names) and number entries from your mobile phone's phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect® website for supported phones.

- To call a name from the Uconnect® Phonebook or downloaded Phonebook, follow the procedure in "Call by Saying a Name" section.

• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect® Phone, for example, after you start the vehicle.
• A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect® Phone.
• Depending on the maximum number of entries downloaded, there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used. Until then, if available, the previously downloaded phonebook is available for use.
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible.
• Either the mobile phone's phonebook or the mobile phone's SIM card phonebook is downloaded.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119

- This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect® Phone. These can only be edited on the mobile phone. The changes are transferred and updated to Uconnect® Phone on the next phone connection.

EditUconnect®PhonebookEntries

NOTE:

• Editing names in the phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited.
• Press the 📞 button to begin.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Phonebook Edit Entry".
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit.

120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• Next, choose the number designation (home, work, mobile, or other) that you wish to edit.
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing.

After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return to the main menu.

"Phonebook Edit Entry" can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number, but you can add "John Doe's" work number later using the "Phonebook Edit Entry" feature.

DeleteUconnect®PhonebookEntry

NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.

- Press the 📞 button to begin.

• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Phonebook Delete".
• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say "List Names" to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose. To select one of the entries from the list, press the ⓊEVR button while the Uconnect® Phone is playing the desired entry and say "Delete".
• After you enter the name, the Uconnect® Phone will ask you which designation you wish to delete: home, work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you wish to delete.
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted.

- Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited.

Delete/Erase"All"Uconnect®PhonebookEntries

- Press the 📊 button to begin.

- After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Phonebook Erase All".

- The Uconnect® Phone will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.

• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be deleted.

- Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted.

• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121

ListAllNamesInTheUconnect®Phonebook

• Press the 📋 button to begin.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Phonebook List Names".
• The Uconnect® Phone will play the names of all the phonebook entries, including the downloaded phonebook entries, if available.
• To call one of the names in the list, press the ⓄEvR button during the playing of the desired name, and say "Call".

NOTE: The user can also exercise "Edit" or "Delete" operations at this point.

• The Uconnect® Phone will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call.
  • The selected number will be dialed.

122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Phone Call Features

The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect® Phone if the feature(s) are available on your mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect® Phone. Check with your mobile service provider for the features that you have.

AnswerOrRejectAnIncomingCall—NoCall CurrentlyInProgress

When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the Uconnect® Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the call. Press the button to accept the call. To reject the call, press and hold the button until you hear a single beep, indicating that the incoming call was rejected.

AnswerOrRejectAnIncomingCall—Call CurrentlyInProgress

If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile phone. Press the 📋 button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call.

NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it.

MakingASecondCallWhileCurrentCallIsIn Progress

To make a second call while you are currently on a call, press the oEVR button and say "Dial" or "Call" followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to

"Toggling Between Calls" in this section. To combine two calls, refer to "Conference Call" in this section.

Place/RetrieveACallFromHold

To put a call on hold, press the button until you hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the button until you hear a single beep.

TogglingBetweenCalls

If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), press the button until you hear a single beep, indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a time.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123

ConferenceCall

When two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), press and hold the button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call.

Three-WayCalling

To initiate three-way calling, press the oEvr button while a call is in progress, and make a second phone call, as described under "Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress". After the second call has established, press and hold the 📋 button until you hear a double beep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call.

CallTermination

To end a call in progress, momentarily press the 📋 button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if there is a call on hold, it will become the new active

124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

call. If the active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call on hold may not become active automatically. This is cell phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the button until you hear a single beep.

Redial

• Press the 📞 button to begin.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Redial".
• The Uconnect® Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your mobile phone.

NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the Uconnect® Phone.

CallContinuation

Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect® Phone after the vehicle ignition has been switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:

• After the ignition is switched to OFF, a call can continue on the Uconnect® Phone either until the call ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the Uconnect® Phone and transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
• After the ignition is cycled to OFF, a call can continue on the Uconnect® Phone for a certain duration, after which the call is automatically transferred from the Uconnect® Phone to the mobile phone.
• An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after the ignition is cycled to OFF.

Uconnect® Phone Features

LanguageSelection

To change the language that the Uconnect® Phone is using:

• Press the 📞 button to begin.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say the name of the language you wish to switch to English, Espanol, or Francais.
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the language selection.

After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and voice commands will be in that language.

NOTE: After every Uconnect® Phone language change operation, only the language-specific 32-name phonebook is usable. The paired phone name is not language-specific and is usable across all languages.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125

Emergency Assistance

If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable:

- Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area.

If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect® Phone is operational, you may reach the emergency number as follows:

• Press the 📞 button to begin.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Emergency" and the Uconnect® Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and Mexico.

126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

• The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not be applicable with the available mobile service and area.
• If supported, this number may be programmable on some systems. To do this, press the button and say "Setup", followed by "Emergency".
• The Uconnect® Phone does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the mobile phone directly.

WARNING!

TouseyouUconnect®PhoneSysteminanemergency,yourmobilephonemustbe:

• turnedon,
•pairedtotheUconnect®System,
• andhavenetworkcoverage.

Roadside Assistance

If you need roadside assistance:

- Press the 📞 button to begin.

- After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Roadside Assistance".

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127

NOTE:

• The roadside assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528-2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the “Roadside Assistance” coverage details on the DVD in the Warranty Information Booklet and the Roadside Assistance references.
• If supported, this number may be programmable on some systems. To do this, press the button and say "Setup", followed by "Roadside Assistance".

Paging

To learn how to page, refer to "Working with Automated Systems". Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies, which time out a little too soon to work properly with the Uconnect® Phone.

VoiceMailCalling

To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to "Working with Automated Systems".

WorkingWithAutomatedSystems

This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system.

You can use your Uconnect® Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service, such as a paging service or automated customer service line. Some services require immediate response selection. In some instances, that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect® Phone.

When calling a number with your Uconnect® Phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence on your mobile phone keypad, you can press the ucvr button and say the sequence you wish to enter, followed by the word "Send". For example, if required to enter

your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you c press the ⓊVR button and say, "3 7 4 6 # Send". Saying a number, or sequence of numbers, followed by "Send", is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure, and to leave a number on a pager.

You can also send stored Uconnect® phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to call and then press the @vrr button and say, "Send." The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send. The Uconnect® Phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.

NOTE:

• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone network configurations. This is normal.
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature.

BargeIn—OverridingPrompts

The "Voice Command" button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately. For example, if a prompt is asking "Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...," you could press the @VR button and say, "Pair a Phone" to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt.

TurningConfirmationPromptsON/OFF

Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect® Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).

• Press the 📊 button to begin.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say one of the following:

- "Setup Confirmation Prompts On"

- "Setup Confirmation Prompts Off"

PhoneAndNetworkStatusIndicators

If available on the radio and/or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by your mobile phone, the Uconnect® Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129

using Uconnect® Phone. The status is given for network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.

DialingUsingTheMobilePhoneKeypad

You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone keypad and still use the Uconnect® Phone (while dialing via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures). By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth® mobile phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle's audio system. The Uconnect® Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using Voice Command.

NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect® Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situation, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the audio.

130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Mute/Un-Mute(MuteON/OFF)

When you mute the Uconnect® Phone, you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In order to mute the Uconnect® Phone:

• Press the _EVR button.
• Following the beep, say "Mute".

In order to un-mute the Uconnect® Phone:

• Press the _EVR button.
• Following the beep, say "Mute off".

Advanced Phone Connectivity

TransferCallToAndFromMobilePhone

The Uconnect® Phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect® Phone without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call from your Uconnect® Phone paired mobile phone to the Uconnect® Phone or vice versa, press the 📋VR button and say "Transfer Call".

ConnectOrDisconnectLinkBetweenThe Uconnect®PhoneAndMobilePhone

Your mobile phone can be paired with many different electronic devices, but can only be actively “connected” with one electronic device at a time.

If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth® connection between your mobile phone and the Uconnect® Phone System, follow the instructions described in your mobile phone User's Manual.

ListPairedMobilePhoneNames

• Press the 📞 button to begin.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Setup Phone Pairing".
• When prompted, say "List Phones".
• The Uconnect® Phone will play the phone names of all paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority. To "Select" or "Delete" a paired phone being announced, press the _v button and say "Select" or "Delete". Also, see the next two sections for an alternate way to "Select" or "Delete" a paired phone.

SelectAnotherMobilePhone

This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the Uconnect® Phone.

- Press the 📞 button to begin.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131

• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Setup Select Phone" and follow the prompts.
• You can also press the button at any time while the list is being played, and then choose the phone that you wish to select.
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone call. If the selected phone is not available, the Uconnect® Phone will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near (approximately within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.

DeleteUconnect®PhonePairedMobilePhones

• Press the 📞 button to begin.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Setup Phone Pairing".
• At the next prompt, say "Delete" and follow the prompts.

132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

- You can also press the 📋 button at any time while the list is being played, and then choose the phone you wish to delete.

Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect® Phone

Uconnect®PhoneTutorial

To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the button and say "Uconnect® Tutorial."

VoiceTraining

For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect® Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this training mode, follow one of the two following procedures:

From outside the Uconnect® Phone mode (e.g., from radio mode):

• Press and hold the ^05VR button for five seconds until the session begins, or,
• Press the ⬆EVR button and say the "Voice Training", "System Training", or "Start Voice Training" command.

You can either press the Uconnect® Phone button to restore the factory setting or repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the Uconnect® Phone. For best results, the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked with the engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan switched off.

This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only.

Reset

- Press the 📞 button.

- After the "Ready" prompt, and the following beep, say "Setup", then "Reset".

This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries, and other settings in all language modes. The System will prompt you before resetting to factory settings.

VoiceCommand

- For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 12 in (1 cm) gap between the overhead console (if equipped) and the mirror.

• Always wait for the beep before speaking.

- Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from you.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133

- Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a Voice Command period.

• Performance is maximized under:

- low-to-medium blower setting,

- low-to-medium vehicle speed,

- low road noise,

- smooth road surface,

- fully closed windows,

• dry weather condition.

- Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English, French, and Spanish accents, the system may not always work for some.

- When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of speaking the digit string, make sure to say "Send".

134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended.
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the Uconnect® Phonebook.
• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect® Phone Local) name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar.
• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. "800" must be spoken "eight-zero-zero" not "eight hundred".
• You can say "O" (letter "O") for "0" (zero).
• Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down.

FarEndAudioPerformance

•Audio quality is maximized under:

• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,

• fully closed windows,
  • dry weather conditions, and
  • operation from the driver's seat.

• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and not the Uconnect® Phone.

• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down.

RecentCalls

If your phone supports "Automatic Phonebook Download", Uconnect® Phone can list your Outgoing, Incoming and Missed Calls.

VoiceTextReply

Uconnect® Phone can read or send new messages on your phone.

ReadMessages:

If you receive a new text message while your phone is connected to Uconnect® Phone, an announcement will be made to notify you that you have a new text message. If you wish to hear the new message:

- Press the 📞 button.

- After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "SMS Read" or "Read Messages."

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135

- Uconnect® Phone will play the new text message for you.

After reading a message, you can "Reply" or "Forward" the message using Uconnect® Phone.

SendMessages:

You can send messages using Uconnect® Phone. To send a new message:

- Press the 📞 button.

• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "SMS Send" or "Send Message."
• You can either say the message you wish to send or say "List Messages." There are 20 preset messages.

To send a message, press the ^06 VR button while the system is listing the message and say "Send."

136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Uconnect® Phone will prompt you to say the name or number of the person you wish to send the message to.

List of Preset Messages:

1. Yes
2. No
3. Where are you?
4. I need more direction.
5. LOL
6. Why
7. I love you
8. Call me

9. Call me later

10. Thanks

11. See You in 15 minutes
12. I am on my way
13. I'll be late
14. Are you there yet?
15. Where are we meeting?
16. Can this wait?
17. Bye for now
18. When can we meet?
19. Send number to call
20. Start without me

TurnSMSIncomingAnnouncementON/OFF

Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop the system from announcing the new incoming messages.

• Press the 📞 button.
• After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say "Setup, SMS Incoming Message Announcement," you will then be given a choice to change it.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137

Bluetooth®CommunicationLink

Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the Uconnect® Phone. When this happens, the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the phone off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth® ON mode.

Power-Up

After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you must wait at least fifteen seconds prior to using the system.

138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

graph TD
    A["Main Menu"] --> B["Recent Calls"]
    A --> C["Call"]
    A --> D["Dial"]
    A --> E["Redial"]
    A --> F["Towing Assistance"]
    A --> G["Emergency"]
    A --> H["English/ Espanol/ Français"]
    A --> I["Phonebook"]
    A --> J["Setup"]
    A --> K["Uconnects Tutorial"]
    A --> L["SMS"]
    M["Enter Name"] --> N["Number associated with entry is dialed"]
    O["Enter Number"] --> P["Number is Dialed"]
    Q["Last Number on Phone is redialed"] --> R["End"]
    S["See Phonebook Flowchart"] --> T["The 32 name language specific phonebook will be used. The phones paired are available across all languages."]
    U["See Setup Flowchart"] --> V["Read Messages"]
    W["Send Messages"] --> X["End"]

Note: Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined.

030772523

graph TD
    A["Phonebook"] --> B["New Entry"]
    A --> C["Edit"]
    A --> D["List Names"]
    A --> E["Delete"]
    A --> F["Erase All"]
    A --> G["Download"]
    B --> H["Enter Name"]
    H --> I["Enter Location"]
    I --> J["Enter Number"]
    J --> K["New Entry Added"]
    C --> L["Enter Name"]
    L --> M["Enter Location"]
    M --> N["Current Number is played"]
    N --> O["Enter New Number"]
    O --> P["Entry is modified"]
    D --> Q["Entries Listed one at a time."]
    E --> R["Enter Name"]
    R --> S["Enter Location"]
    S --> T["Entry Deleted"]
    F --> U["1st Confirmation"]
    U --> V["2nd Confirmation"]
    V --> W["Phonebook Cleared"]

Note: Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined.

81c6bf80

Voice Tree - Setup

graph TD
    A["Setup"] --> B["Confirmation Prompts"]
    A --> C["Select Audio Devices"]
    A --> D["SMS. Incoming Message Announcement"]
    A --> E["Voice Training"]
    A --> F["Reset"]
    A --> G["Device Fairing"]
    A --> H["Emergency"]
    A --> I["Towing Assistance"]
    A --> J["Select Phone"]
    A --> K["Language"]
    B --> L["Toggle Confirmation Prompts on/off"]
    C --> M["Pair"]
    D --> N["Say 4 digit pin code."]
    E --> O["List Phones"]
    F --> P["Enter Name of phone and follow prompts to complete pairing."]
    G --> Q["Delete"]
    H --> R["New phone will temporarily override phone priorities."]
    I --> S["Select a language: English, Espanol or Francas"]
    J --> T["All Phones Deleted"]
    K --> U["All Phones Deleted"]
    L --> V["Select phone to be deleted"]
    M --> W["System Lists Phones"]
    N --> X["System confirms"]
    O --> Y["List Phones"]
    P --> Z["All Phones Deleted"]

Note: Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined. 030605540

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141

Voice Commands
Primary Alternate (s)
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location

all
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
home

142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
other
pair a phone
phone pairing pairing
phonebook phone book
previous
record again
redial
return to main menu return or main menu

select phone select
send
set up phone settings or phone set up
towing assistance
transfer call
Uconnect® Tutorial
voice training
work
yes

General Information

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:

• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143

VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED

Voice Command System Operation

The Uconnect® Voice Command system allows you to control your AM, FM radio, disk player, USB mass storage class device, iPod® family of devices, Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device,

satellite radio, disc player, and a memo recorder.

NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level.

144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

Anyvoicecommandedsystemshouldbeusedonlyinsafedrivingconditionsfollowingallapplicablelaws.Yourattentionshoubbefocusedonsafelyoperatingthevehicle.Failurertodosomayresultincollisioncausingseriousinjuryordeath.

When you press the Voice Command 📄 button, you will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a command.

NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few seconds, the system will present you with a list of options.

If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists options, press the Voice Command ( v_E^VR ) button, listen for the beep, and say your command.

Pressing the Voice Command of a button while the system is speaking is known as "barging in." The system will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or change commands. This will become helpful once you start to learn the options.

NOTE: At any time, you can say the words "Cancel", "Help" or "Main Menu".

These commands are universal and can be used from any menu. All other commands can be used depending upon the active application.

When using this system, you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume.

The system will best recognize your speech if the windows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is set to low.

At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.

To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice Command ⬆vvr button and say "Help" or "Main Menu".

Commands

The Voice Command system understands two types of commands. Universal commands are available at all times. Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active.

ChangingtheVolume

1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command (OEVR) button.
2. Say a command (e.g., "Help").
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for Voice Command is different than the audio system.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145

MainMenu

Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command Ⓞ€vr button. You may say "Main Menu" to switch to the main menu.

In this mode, you can say the following commands:

• "Radio AM" (to switch to the radio AM mode)
• "Radio FM" (to switch to radio FM mode)
• "Disc" (to switch to the disc mode)
• "USB" (to switch to USB mode)
• "Bluetooth Streaming" (to switch to Bluetooth® Streaming mode)
• "Memo" (to switch to the memo recorder)
• "System Setup" (to switch to system setup)

146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

RadioAM

To switch to the AM band, say "AM" or "Radio AM". In this mode, you may say the following commands:

• "Frequency #" (to change the frequency)
• "Next Station" (to select the next station)
• "Previous Station" (to select the previous station)
• "Radio Menu" (to switch to the radio menu)
• "Main Menu" (to switch to the main menu)

RadioFM

To switch to the FM band, say "FM" or "Radio FM". In this mode, you may say the following commands:

• "Frequency #" (to change the frequency)
• "Next Station" (to select the next station)

• "Previous Station" (to select the previous station)

• "Menu Radio" (to switch to the radio menu)

• "Main Menu" (to switch to the main menu)

SatelliteRadio

To switch to satellite radio mode, say "Sat" or "Satellite Radio". In this mode, you may say the following commands:

• "Channel Number" (to change the channel by its spoken number)
• "Next Channel" (to select the next channel)
• "Previous Channel" (to select the previous channel)
• "List Channel" (to hear a list of available channels)
• "Select Name" (to say the name of a channel)
• "Menu Radio" (to switch to the radio menu)
• "Main Menu" (to switch to the main menu)

DiscMode

To switch to the disc mode, say "Disc". In this mode, you may say the following commands:

• "Track" (#) (to change the track)
• "Next Track" (to play the next track)
• "Previous Track" (to play the previous track)
• "Main Menu" (to switch to the main menu)

MemoMode

To switch to the voice recorder mode, say "Memo". In this mode, you may say the following commands:

• "New Memo" (to record a new memo) — During the recording, you may press the Voice Command button to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of the following commands:
• "Save" (to save the memo)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147

• "Continue" (to continue recording)
• "Delete" (to delete the recording)

- "Play Memos" (to play previously recorded memos) — During the playback you may press the Voice Command ^06 VR button to stop playing memos. You proceed by saying one of the following commands:

• "Repeat" (to repeat a memo)
• "Next" (to play the next memo)
• "Previous" (to play the previous memo)
• "Delete" (to delete a memo)

- "Delete All" (to delete all memos)

Setup

To switch to system setup, you may say one of the following:

• "Change to setup"
• "Switch to system setup"

148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• "Change to setup"
• "Main menu setup" or
• "Switch to setup"

In this mode, you may say the following commands:

• "Language English"
• "Language French"
• "Language Spanish"
- "Tutorial"
- "Voice Training"

NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice Command 05VR button first and wait for the beep before speaking the "Barge In" commands.

Voice Training

For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect® Voice "Voice Training" feature may be used.

1. Press the Voice Command 06VR button, say "System Setup" and once you are in that menu then say "Voice Training." This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recognition.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by Uconnect® Voice. For best results, the "Voice Training" session should be completed when the vehicle is parked, engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only.

SEATS

Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle.

WARNING!

• Itisdangeroustorideinacargoarea, insideor outsideofvehicle. Inacollision, peopleriding in theseareasaremorelikelytobeseriouslyinjured orkilled.
• Donotallowpeopletorideinanyareaofyour vehiclethatisnotequippedwithseatsandseat belts.Inacollision,peopleridingintheseareasare morelikelytobeseriouslyinjuredorkilled.
• Besureeveryoneinyourvehicleisinaseatand usingaseatbeltproperly.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149

Power Seats — If Equipped

Some models may be equipped with a power driver's seat. The power seat switch is located on the outboard side of the seat near the floor. Use the switch to move the seat up, down, forward, rearward, or to tilt the seat.

Interior view of a car's seatbelt and dashboard compartment showing the left side with a black arrow pointing to the lower side (no text or symbols present)

PowerSeatSwitch

150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

• Adjustingaseatwhiledrivingmaybedangerous. Movingaseatwhiledrivingcouldresultinlossof controlwhichcouldcauseacollisionandserious injuryordeath.
• Seatsshouldbeadjustedbeforefasteningtheseat beltsandwhilethevehicleisparked.Serious injuryordeathcouldresultfromapoorlyadjusted seatbelt.

CAUTION!

Donotplaceanyarticleunderapowerseator impedeitsabilitytomoveasitmaycausedamageto theseatcontrols.Seattravelmaybecomelimitedif movementisstoppedbyanobstructionintheseat's path.

AdjustingTheSeatForwardOrRearward

The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached.

AdjustingTheSeatUpUpDown

The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position is reached.

TiltingTheSeatUpUpDown

The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position is reached.

Heated Seats — If Equipped

On some models, the front driver and passenger seats may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks. The controls for the front heated seats are located on the center instrument panel area.

You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings. Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.

Press the switch once to select HIGH-level heating. Press the switch a second time to select LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF.

When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the initial stages of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LOW-level after approximately

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

151

30 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. When the LOW-level heating is selected, the system automatically turns the heater and the indicator light OFF after a maximum of 30 minutes of continuous operation.

NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes.

WARNING!

- Personswhoareunabletofeelpaintotheskin becauseofadvancedage,chronicillness,diabetes, spinalcordinjury,medication,alcoholuse,exhaustionorotherphysicalconditionmustexercisecare whenusingtheseatheater.Itmaycauseburnseven atlowtemperatures,especiallyifusedforlong periodsoftime.

(Continued)

152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!(Continued)

- Donotplaceanythingontheseatorseatbackthat insulatesagainstheat,suchasablanketorcushion. Thismaycausetheseatheatertooverheat.Sitting inaseatthathasbeenoverheatedcouldcause seriousburnsduetotheincreasedsurfacetemperatureoftheseat.

Manual Front Seat Adjustment

On models equipped with manual seats, the adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats, near the floor. While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.

Interior view of a car seat assembly with a white arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols present)

ManualSeatAdjustingBar

WARNING!

• Adjustingaseatwhiledrivingmaybedangerous. Movingaseatwhiledrivingcouldresultinlossof controlwhichcouldcauseacollisionandserious injuryordeath.
• Seatsshouldbeadjustedbeforefasteningtheseat beltsandwhilethevehicleisparked.Serious injuryordeathcouldresultfromapoorlyadjusted seatbelt.

Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped

The driver's seat height can be raised or lowered by using a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat. Pull upward on the lever to raise the seat height or push downward on the lever to lower the seat height.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153

Illustration of a car seat with a black arrow pointing to the seat area (no text or symbols present)

030907660

SeatHeightAdjustmentLever

154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Manual Lumbar — If Equipped

The lumbar adjustment handle is located on the outboard side of the driver's seatback. Rotate the lever downward to increase the lumbar support or rotate the lever upward to decrease the lumbar support.

Interior view of a car seatbelt with a black arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols on the main body)

LumbarAdjustmentLever

Driver's Seatback Recline

To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired angle and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift the lever, lean forward and release the lever.

Interior view of a car showing the seatbelt and dashboard mechanism (no text or symbols visible)

ReclineLever

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155

WARNING!

Donotridewiththeseatbackreclinedsothatthe shoulderbeltisnolongerrestingagainstyourchest. Inacollisionyoucouldslideundertheseatbelt, whichcouldresultinseriousinjuryordeath.

156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat

To fold the front passenger seat, lift the recliner handle to the full upward position and push the seatback forward until it rests on the seat cushion.

Interior view of a car seatbelt with a black arrow pointing to the seat (no text or symbols visible)

Fold-FlatLever

Interior view of a car showing full seatbelt and rear seats (no text or symbols visible)

Fold-FlatSeat

Head Restraints

Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.

WARNING!

Theheadrestraintsforalloccupantsmustbeproperlyadjustedpriortooperatingthevehicleoroccupyingaseat.Headrestraintsshouldneverbeadjustedwhilethevehicleisinmotion.Drivinga vehiclewiththeheadrestraintsimproperlyadjusted orremovedcouldcauseseriousinjuryordeathinthe eventofacollision.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157

ActiveHeadRestraints—FrontSeats

Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and trim, the back half being decorative plastic.

When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant's head and the AHR. This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts. Refer to "Occupant Restraints" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.

158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push downward on the head restraint.

PushButton 030907490

For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted forward and backward. To tilt the head restraint closer to the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head restraint to move the head restraint away from your head.

3D rendered mechanical component with neck and shoulder features, labeled 'ActiveHeadRestraint(NormalPosition)' at bottom (no other text or symbols)

3D rendering of a car seat and neck component with directional arrow (no text or symbols)

ActiveHeadRestraint(TiltedPosition)

030907533

NOTE:

- The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159

- In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint, refer to "Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.

WARNING!

• DonotplaceitemsoverthetopoftheActiveHead Restraint,suchascoats,seatcoversorportable DVDplayers. Theseitemsmayinterferewiththe operationoftheActiveHeadRestraintintheevent ofacollisionandcouldresultinseriousinjuryor death.
• ActiveHeadRestraintsmaybedeployediftheyare struckbyanobjectsuchasahand,footorloose cargo.ToavoidaccidentaldeploymentoftheActiveHeadRestraintensurethatallcargoissecured,

(Continued)

160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!(Continued)

asloosecargocouldcontacttheActiveHeadRestraintduringsuddenstops.Failuretofollowthis warningcouldcausepersonalinjuryiftheActive HeadRestraintisdeployed.

RearHeadRestraints

The head restraints in the rear are non adjustable. Refer to "Occupant Restraints" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for information on Tether routing.

Folding Rear Seat

To provide additional storage area, each rear seatback can be folded forward. Pull the strap forward to fold the rear seatback flat.

Interior view of a car showing the seatbelt and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

RearSeatReleaseStrap

Interior view of a car showing the rear seat, dashboard, and side seats (no text or symbols visible)

FoldedRearSeat

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161

To raise the seatback, pull the strap forward and lift the seatback into its upright position.

WARNING!

Becertainthattheseatbackissecurelylockedinto position.Iftheseatbackisnotsecurelylockedinto positiontheseatwillnotprovidetheproperstability forchildseatsand/orpassengers.Animproperly latchedseatcouldcauseseriousinjury.

162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Reclining Rear Seat — If Equipped

For additional comfort, pull the strap forward just enough to release the seatback latch. Then push the seatback to a reclined position, approximately 35 degrees maximum, and release the strap.

WARNING!

Donotridewiththeseatbackreclinedsothatthe shoulderbeltisnolongerrestingagainstyourchest. Inacollisionyoucouldslideundertheseatbeltand beseriouslyorevenfatallyinjured. Usetherecliner onlywiththevehicleisparked.

TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD

To open the hood, two latches must be released.

1. Pull the hood release lever located on the left kick panel.

Interior view of a car dashboard with air vent, mode shift, and traffic control buttons (no text or symbols)

HoodReleaseLever

1. Move the safety latch, located outside the vehicle under the front edge of the hood, toward the center and raise the hood.

Front view of a black SUV with a white arrow pointing downward on the grille (no text or symbols)

HoodSafetyLatchLocation

031340027

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163

Lift the hood prop rod, clipped to the right side (left side facing hood) of the engine compartment to secure the hood in the open position. Place the hood prop at the location stamped into the inner hood surface.

Close-up of a car's front panel showing wiring and cable connections (no text or symbols visible)

PropRodLocation

164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

Topreventpossibledamage, donotslamthehoodto closeit. Lowerthehooduntilitisopen8in(20cm) approximately andthendropit. This should secure bothlatches. Never drive your vehicle unless the hoodisfullyclosed, with bothlatches engaged.

WARNING!

Besurethehoodisfullylatchedbeforedrivingyour vehicle.Ifthehoodisnotfullylatched,itcouldopen whenthevehicleisinmotionandblockyourvision. Failuretofollowthiswarningcouldresultinserious injuryordeath.

LIGHTS

Multifunction Lever

The multifunction lever controls the operation of the headlights, parking lights, turn signals, headlight beam selection, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights, the passing lights, and the fog lights. The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165

Close-up of a black handheld device with control buttons and indicator lights (no readable text or symbols)

031407547

Close-up of a black handheld device with control buttons and directional arrows (no readable text or symbols)

031407548
MultifunctionLever

Headlights And Parking Lights

Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent to turn on the parking lights. Turn the end of the lever to the second detent to turn on the headlights.

HeadlightControl

Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped

The high beam lights will come on as Daytime Running Lights (lower intensity), whenever the ignition is ON, the engine is running, the headlight switch is off, the parking brake is off, the turn signal is off, and the shift lever is in any position except PARK.

166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Lights-On Reminder

If the headlights or parking lights are left on after the ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver's door is opened.

Fog Lights — If Equipped

The front fog light switch is on the multifunction lever. To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and pull out the end of the multifunction lever.

Close-up of a black handheld device with control buttons and an arrow indicator (no readable text or symbols)

031407550

FrontFogLightOperation

NOTE: The fog lights will only operate with the headlights on low beam. Selecting high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.

Turn Signals

Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.

Close-up of a black handheld device with directional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols visible)

031407551
TurnSignalOperation

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167

NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective.

LaneChangeAssist

Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash three times then automatically turn off.

High/Low Beam Switch

Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.

168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Flash-To-Pass

You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is released.

NOTE: If the multifunction lever is held in the flash-to-pass position for more than 20 seconds, the high beams will shut off. If this occurs, wait 30 seconds for the next flash-to-pass operation.

Instrument Panel Dimming

Rotate the center portion of the lever to the extreme bottom position to fully dim the instrument panel lights and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a door is opened.

Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights when the parking lights or headlights are on.

Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next detent position to brighten the odometer and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on.

Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last detent to turn on the interior lighting.

Close-up of a black handheld device with control buttons and directional arrows indicating rotation (no readable text or symbols)

DimmerControl

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169

Map/Reading Lights

These lights are mounted between the sun visors above the rear view mirror. Each light is turned on by pressing the button. Press the button a second time to turn the light off. The lights also come on when a door is opened or the dimmer control is turned fully upward, past the second detent.

Interior view of a car showing the rearview mirror and dashboard with two black arrows pointing to the top panel (no text or symbols present)

Map/ReadingLights

NOTE: The lights will remain on until the switch is pressed a second time, so be sure they have been turned off before leaving the vehicle. They will not turn off automatically.

170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS

The windshield wiper/washer control lever is located on the right side of the steering column.

The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch, located on the end of the lever. For information on the rear wiper/washer, refer to "Rear Window Features" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle".

REAR FRONT MIST PULL LD HI

036407502

Wiper/WasherControlLever

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171

CAUTION!

• Turnthewindshieldwipersoffwhendriving throughanautomaticcarwash.Damagetothewindshieldwipersmayresultifthewipercontrolisleftin anypositionotherthanoff.
• Incoldweather, alwaysturnoffthewiperswitch andallowthewiperstoreturntothe "Park" positionbeforeturningofftheengine. If thewiper switchisleftonandthewipersfreezetothewindshield,damagetowthewipermotormayoccur whenthevehicleisrestarted.
• Alwaysremoveanybuildupofsnowthatprevents thewindshieldwiperbladesfromreturningtothe offposition.Ifthewindshieldwipercontrolis turnedoffandthebladescannotreturntotheoff position,damagetothewipermotormayoccur.

Windshield Wiper Operation

Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation. Rotate the end of the lever upward to the third detent past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper operation.

REAR FRONT PULL LO H1 MIST ▼

031507503
WindshieldWiperOperation

172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Intermittent Wiper System

Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. Select the delay interval by turning the end of the lever. Rotate the end of the lever upward (clockwise) to decrease the delay time and downward (counterclockwise) to increase the delay time. The delay can be regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles, to a cycle every second.

NOTE: The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed. If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.

Windshield Washers

To use the washer, pull the control lever toward you and hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in the delay range, the wiper will operate in low-speed

while the lever is pulled and for two wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected.

If the lever is pulled while in the off position, the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles, then turn off.

WARNING!

Suddenlossofvisibilitythroughthewindshield couldleadtoacollision.Youmightnotseeother vehiclesorotherobstacles.Toavoidsuddenicingof thewindshieldduringfreezingweather,warmthe windshieldwiththedefrosterbeforeandduring windshieldwasheruse.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173

Mist Feature

Push down on the control lever to activate a single wipe to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. As long as the lever is held down, the wipers will continue to operate.

NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield. The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid.

REAR FRONT MIST PULL LO HI

031507504

MistOperation

174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE TILT STEERING COLUMN

This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. The tilt steering column lever is located on the left side of the steering column, below the turn signal lever.

Push down on the lever to unlock the steering column. With one hand firmly on the steering wheel, move the steering column up or down, as desired. Push the lever up to lock the steering column firmly in place.

Interior view of a car dashboard and seatbelt mechanism (no text or symbols visible)

TiltSteeringColumnLever

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175

WARNING!

Donotadjustthesteeringcolumnwhiledriving. Adjustingthesteeringcolumnwhiledrivingordrivingwiththesteeringcolumnunlocked,couldcause thedrivertolosecontrolofthevehicle.Failureto followthiswarningmayresultinseriousinjuryor death.

ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED

When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).

The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel.

1 ON/OFF RES + CANCEL SET - 2 3 4 032209541

ElectronicSpeedControlButtons

1—ON/OFF 2—RES +

4 — CANCEL 3 — SET -

176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed.

To Activate

Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be turned off when not in use.

WARNING!

LeavingtheElectronicSpeedControlsystemon whennotinuseisdangerous.Youcouldaccidentally setthesystemorcauseittogofasterthanyouwant. Youcouldlosecontrolandhaveanaccident.Always leavethesystemOFFwhenyouarenotusingit.

To Set A Desired Speed

Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.

NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET (-) button.

To Deactivate

A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory.

To Resume Speed

To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) button and release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).

To Vary The Speed Setting

When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.

Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a1mph (1.6 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released. Release the button when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed will be established.

Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a1mph (1.6 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To Accelerate For Passing

Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.

UsingElectronicSpeedControlOnHills

The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed.

NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal.

On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control.

WARNING!

ElectronicSpeedControlcanbedangerouswherethe systemcannotmaintainaconstantspeed.Yourvehiclecouldgotoofastfortheconditions,andyou couldlosecontrolandhaveanaccident.Donotuse ElectronicSpeedControlinheavytrafficoronroads thatarewinding,icy,snow-coveredorslippery.

GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED

HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery.

The HomeLink® buttons, located on either the overhead console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three different HomeLink® channels. The HomeLink® indicator is located above the center button.

Control panel with four vertical buttons and a house icon above it (no text or symbols on the buttons)

HomeLink®Buttons/OverheadConsoles

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179

Gray oval button with three oval holes and a small house icon above it (no text or symbols)

034000355

HomeLink®Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner

NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.

180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®

Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming.

For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink® system.

Erase all channels before you begin programming. To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink® buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red indicator flashes.

NOTE:

• Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.

Programming A Rolling Code

For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be identified by the "LEARN" or "TRAIN" button located where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close the door. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.

Technical diagram showing a hand holding a device labeled '1' and pointing to a cable or switch component, with a close-up view of the device's cable and switch assembly.

TrainingTheGarageDoorOpener

1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button

1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181

1. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
2. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink® button you want to program and the hand-held transmitter button.
3. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid.
4. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate the "LEARN" or "TRAINING" button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener/device motor.

182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Firmly press and release the "LEARN" or "TRAINING" button. On some garage door openers/devices there may be a light that blinks when the garage door opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.

NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed.

1. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device activates, programming is complete.

NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to complete the training.

To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels.

ReprogrammingASingleHomeLink®Button

To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps:

1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not releasethebutton.
3. Withoutreleasingthebuttonproceed with "Programming A Rolling Code" Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.

Programming A Non-Rolling Code

For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured before 1995.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.

2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.

3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink® button you want to program and the hand-held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The Homelink® indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button and observe the indicator light.
6. If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183

- To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels.

ReprogrammingASingleHomeLink®Button

To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not releasethebutton.
3. Withoutreleasingthebuttonproceed with "Programming A Rolling Code" Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.

184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Canadian/Gate Operator Programming

For programming transmitters in Canada/United States that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after several seconds of transmission.

Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the same manner.

It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor.

1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.

2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.

3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button, while you press and release ("cycle"), your hand-held transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.

4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may open and close while you are programming.

5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button and observe the indicator light.

6. If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.

7. To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels.

If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for programming, plug it back in at this time.

ReprogrammingASingleHomeLink®Button

To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps:

1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not releasethebutton.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185

1. Withoutreleasingthebutton proceed with "Canadian/ Gate Operator Programming" Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.

Using HomeLink®

To operate, press and release the programmed HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time.

Security

It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle.

To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be erased.

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.

Troubleshooting Tips

If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®, here are some of the most common solutions:

• Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter.
• Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in?

If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.

WARNING!

• Yourmotorizeddoororgatewillopenandclose whileyouareprogrammingtheuniversaltransceiver.Donotprogramthetransceiverifpeople, petsorotherobjectsareinthepathofthedooror gate.Onlyusethistransceiverwithagaragedoor openerthathasa"stopandreverse"featureas requiredbyFederalsafetystandards.Thisincludes mostgaragedooropenermodelsmanufactured after1982.Donotuseagaragedooropenerwithout thesesafetyfeatures.Calltoll-free1-800-355-3515 or,ontheInternetatwww.HomeLink.comfor safetyinformationorassistance.
• Vehicleexhaustcontainscarbonmonoxide,adangerousgas.Donotrunyourvehicleinthegarage whileprogrammingthetransceiver.Exhaustgas cancauseseriousinjuryordeath.

General Information

This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187

NOTE:

• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.

188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED

The power sunroof switch is located on the overhead console.

AUTO VENT AUTO

034206938
PowerSunroofSwitch

WARNING!

• Neverleavechildreninavehiclewiththekeyin theignitionswitch.Occupants,particularlyunattendedchildren,canbecomeentrappedbythe powersunroofwhileoperatingthepowersunroof switch.Suchentrapmentmayresultinserious injuryordeath.
• Inacollision, thereisagreaterriskofbeingthrown fromvehiclewithanopensunroof. Youcould alsobeseriouslyinjuredorkilled. Alwaysfasten yourseatbeltproperlyandmakesureallpassengersareproperlysecured.
• Donotallowsmallchildrentooperatethesunroof. Neverallowyourfingers,otherbodyparts,orany objecttoprojectthroughthesunroofopening. Injurymayresult.

Opening Sunroof — Express

Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automatically from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.

Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode

To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again.

Closing Sunroof — Express

Press the switch forward and release it within one-half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189

position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called "Express Close". During Express Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.

Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode

To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again.

Pinch Protect Feature

This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and release to Express Close.

190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.

Venting Sunroof — Express

Press and release the Vent button within one half second and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is called "Express Vent", and it will occur regardless of sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.

Sunshade Operation

The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.

NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open.

Wind Buffeting

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window.

Sunroof Maintenance

Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191

Ignition Off Operation

For Vehicles Not Equipped With The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

The power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.

ForVehiclesEquippedWithTheEVIC

The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.

ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS

There is a standard 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet located in the instrument panel for added convenience. This power outlet can power mobile phones, electronics and other low power devices.

Interior view of a car gear shift control panel with no visible text or symbols on the main component.

12VoltPowerOutlet

Power is available when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position. Insert the cigar lighter or accessory plug into the outlet for use. Topreservetheheatingelement, donotholdthelighterintheheatingposition.

192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR® knob and element must be used.

CAUTION!

• Donotexceedthemaximumpowerof160Watts (13Amps)at12Volts.Ifthe160Watt(13Amp) powerratingisexceededthefuseprotectingthe systemwillneedtobereplaced.
• Poweroutletsaredesignedforaccessoryplugs only.Donotinsertanyotherobjectinthepower outletsasthiswilldamagetheoutletandblowthe fuse.Improperuseofthepoweroutletcancause damagenotcoveredbyyourNewVehicleLimited Warranty.

Interior view of a black electronic device casing with multiple ports and buttons, no visible text or symbols

034636797

PowerOutletFuseLocation

WARNING!

Toavoidseriousinjuryordeath:

• Onlydevicesdesignedforuseinthistypeofoutlet shouldbeinsertedintoany12Voltoutlet.
• Donottouchwithwethands.
• Closethelidwhennotinuseandwhiledrivingthe vehicle.
• If this outletismishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure.

CAUTION!

• Manyaccessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle's battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in longenough, the vehicle's battery will discharges sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with great caution.
• Aftertheuseofhighpowerdrawaccessories,or longperiodsofthevehiclenotbeingstarted(with accessoriesstillpluggedin),thevehiclemustbe drivenasufficientlengthoftimetoallowthe generatortorechargethevehicle'sbattery.

194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED

A 115 Volt (150 Watt) AC power inverter is located on the front of the center console for added convenience. This outlet can power mobile phones, electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as PlayStation3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as will most power tools.

The power inverter is designed with built-in overload protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter may have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter manually, unplug the device and plug it in again. To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.

Interior view of a car showing the rear seat with a close-up of the door panel and a black arrow pointing to it (no text or symbols on the main subject)

115VoltPowerOutlet

WARNING!

Toavoidseriousinjuryordeath:

• Donotuseathree-prongadaptor.
• Donotinsertanyobjectsintothereceptacles.
• Donottouchwithwethands.
  • Closethelidwhennotinuse.
• If this outletismishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure.

CAUTION!

• Manyaccessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle's battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in longenough, the vehicle's battery will discharges sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent engine starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with great caution.
• Aftertheuseofhighpowerdrawaccessories,or longperiodsofthevehiclenotbeingstarted(with accessoriesstillpluggedin),thevehiclemustbe drivenasufficientlengthoftimetoallowthe generatortorechargethevehicle'sbattery.

196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CUPHOLDERS

Your vehicle is equipped with four cupholders. There are two illuminated cupholders located in the front.

Interior view of a car dashboard with seatbelt and airway (no visible text or symbols)

FrontCupholders

There are two cupholders located in the back for the rear passengers.

Interior view of a car showing a car intake canal and seat, with a black arrow pointing to the intake area (no text or symbols present)

RearCupholders

STORAGE

Glove Compartment And Storage Bin

Located on the passenger side of the instrument panel are an upper storage bin and a lower glove compartment.

Interior view of a car dashboard with labeled controls and directional arrows indicating movement or navigation.

StorageBins

1 — Upper Storage Bin
2 — Lower Glove Compartment

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197

To open the lower glove compartment, pull outward on the release handle.

Interior view of a vehicle showing a car intake manifold with a white arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols visible)

GloveCompartment

198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Door Storage

The interior door panels are equipped with lower storage areas.

Interior view of a car dashboard with a black arrow pointing to the left side (no text or symbols visible)

FrontDoorStorage

Interior view of a car dashboard with a black arrow pointing to the left side (no text or symbols visible)

RearDoorStorage

CONSOLE FEATURES

The floor console contains both an upper and lower storage compartment.

To open the upper storage compartment, push inward on the upper handle to unlatch the upper lid and lift the lid open.

Interior view of a car seatbelt with a black arrow pointing to the seat (no text or symbols visible)

UpperStorageCompartment

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199

To open the lower storage compartment, lift upward on the lower handle to unlatch the lower storage compartment and lift the lid open.

Interior view of a car seatbelt with a black arrow pointing to a specific seatbelt component (no text or symbols visible)

LowerStorageCompartment

200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

Donotoperatethisvehiclewithaconsolecompartmentlidintheopenposition.Cellularphones,music players,andotherhandheldelectronicdevices shouldbestowedwhiledriving.Useofthesedevices whiledrivingcancauseanaccidentduetodistraction,resultingindeathorinjury.

CARGO AREA FEATURES

Cargo Light/Removable Self-Recharging Flashlight

The dual-function light is mounted in the headliner above the cargo area to illuminate the cargo area, and part of it snaps out of the bezel to serve as a flashlight when needed. The flashlight features two bright LED

light bulbs and is powered by rechargeable lithium batteries that recharge when snapped back into place for convenience.

Press in on the flashlight to release it.

Interior view of a car dashboard with a black arrow pointing to the top panel (no text or symbols on the dashboard itself)

FlashlightLocation/PressToRelease

To operate the flashlight, press the switch once for high, twice for low, and a third time to return to off.

Close-up of a white electronic device with a black arrow pointing to a button labeled 'PUSH' (no other text or symbols visible)

035410217

ThreePressSwitch

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201

Cargo Cover

The cargo area trim panels include two notches for mounting the available tonneau cover that accommodates the reclining rear seat.

To install the Cargo Cover, insert either end of the cover into one of the two notches located in the rear trim panels. With one of the cover ends installed, push inward on the opposite end and install it into the same notch location of the rear trim panel.

202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Close-up of a hand adjusting a car handle panel with two upward arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

RearTrimNotches

Using the handle, pull the cover toward you and guide the rear cover posts into the guides located on both sides of the rear trim panel.

Close-up of a car interior showing a seatbelt and dashboard, with a white arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols visible)

CargoCoverGuides

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203

WARNING!

Inacollisionacargocoverlooseinthevehiclecould causeinjury.Itcouldflyaroundinasuddenstopand strikesomeoneinthevehicle.Donotstorethecargo coveronthecargofloororinthepassengercompartment.Removethecoverfromthevehiclewhentaken fromitsmounting.Donotstoreinthevehicle.

Removable Load Floor

The cargo area load floor is removable and can be washed with mild soap and water.

Interior view of a car trunk with a black arrow pointing to the rear compartment (no text or symbols)

RemovableLoadFloor

204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Cargo Tie-Down Loops

There are four tie-downs (D-rings) installed in the cargo area for securing cargo.

Top-down view of a car's rear bumper with four directional arrows indicating orientation (no text or symbols)

CargoAreaTie-Downs

WARNING!

• Cargotie-downloopsarenotsafeanchorsfora childseattetherstrap.Inasuddenstoporcollision aloopcouldpullooseandallowthechildseatto comeloose.Achildcouldbebadlyinjured.Use onlytheanchorsprovidedforchildseattethers.
• Theweightandpositionofcargoandpassengerscan changethevehiclecenterofgravityandvehicle handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle:
• Alwaysplacecargoevenlyonthecargofloor.Put heavierobjectsaslowandasfarforwardaspossible.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Placeasmuchcargoaspossibleinfrontoftherear axle.Toomuchweightorimproperlyplacedweight overorbehindtherearaxlecancausetherearof thevehicletosway.
• Donotpile luggage or cargohigher than the top of these at back. This could impair visibility or become dangerous projectile in as sudden stop or collision.
• Tohelpprotectagainstpersonalinjury,passengers shouldnotbeseatedintherearcargoarea.Therear cargospaceisintendedforloadcarryingpurposes only,notforpassengers,whoshouldsitinseats anduseseatbelts.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205

Fold Down Speakers — If Equipped

When the liftgate is open, the speakers can swing down off the trim panel to face rearward, for tailgating and other activities.

Top-down view of a car backrest with visible sound bubbles and a black arrow pointing to the front panel (no text or symbols)

FoldDownSpeakers

206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

REAR WINDOW FEATURES

Rear Window Wiper/Washer

The rear wiper/washer is controlled by a rotary switch located on the center portion of the control lever. The control lever is located on the right side of the steering column.

REAR FRONT MIST PULL LO HI

031507505

RearWiper/WasherControlLever

Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the first detent position for rear wiper operation.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207

NOTE: The rear wiper operates in an intermittent mode only.

Rotate the center portion of the lever past the first detent to activate the rear washer. The washer pump and the wiper will continue to operate as long as the switch is held (for a maximum of 10 seconds). Upon release, the wiper will continue to cycle two times before returning to the set position.

If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the "park" position if power accessory delay is active. Power accessory delay can be cancelled by opening the door, if this happens the rear wiper will stop at its current position and will not go to "park".

Rear Window Defroster

The rear window defroster button is located on the bottom right-side of the blower control knob.

Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation, press the button a second time.

NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements:

• Usecarewhenwashingtheinsideoftherear window.Donotuseabrasivewindowcleanerson theinteriorsurfaceofthewindow.Useasoftcloth andamildwashingsolution,wipingparalleltothe heatingelements.Labelscanbepeeledoffafter soakingwithwarmwater.
• Donotusescrapers, sharpinstruments, or abrasive windowcleanersontheinteriorsurfaceofthe window.
• Keepallobjectsasafedistancefromthewindow.

ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED

The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The load must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.

NOTE: If not equipped with crossbars, your authorized dealer can order and install MOPAR® crossbars built specifically for this roof rack system.

Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars. The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.

The optional crossbars must also be secured in one of the seven detent positions marked with an arrow on the siderails to prevent movement. To move the crossbars, loosen the thumb screws located at the upper edge of each crossbar approximately eight turns, then move the crossbar to the desired position, keeping the crossbars parallel to the rack frame. Once the crossbar is in one of the seven detent positions, retighten the thumb screws to lock the crossbar into position.

NOTE:

- To help control wind noise when the crossbars are not in use, place the front crossbar in the first detent from the front of the vehicle and the rear crossbar in the second detent from the rear of the vehicle.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209

• If the rear crossbar (or any metallic object) is placed over the satellite radio antenna (if equipped), you may experience interruption of satellite radio reception. For improved satellite radio reception, place the rear crossbar in the second detent from the rear of the vehicle when not in use.
• The grab handles on the back of the vehicle (if equipped) are not to be used as a towing feature.

CAUTION!

- Topreventdamagetotheroofofyourvehicle,DO NOTcarryanyloadsontheroofrackwithout crossbarsinstalled. Theloadshouldbesecuredand placedontopofthecrossbars,notdirectlyonthe roof. Ifitisnecessarytoplacetheloadontheroof, placeablanketorsomeotherprotectionbetween the loadandtheroofsurface.

(Continued)

210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!(Continued)

• To avoid damage to other refrack and vehicle, do not exceed the maximum refrack load capacity of 150 lb (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as evenly possible and secure the load appropriately.
• Longloadswhichextendoverthewindshield,such aswoodpanelsorsurfboards,orloadswithlarge frontalareashouldbesecuredtoboththefrontand rearofthevehicle.
• Travelatreducedspeedsandturncornerscarefully whencarryinglargeorheavyloadsontheroof rack.Windforces,duetonaturalcausesornearby trucktraffic,canaddsuddenupwardlifttoaload. Thisisespeciallytrueonlargeflatloadsandmay resultindamagetothecargooryourvehicle.

WARNING!

Cargomustbesecurelytiedbeforedrivingyour vehicle.Improperlysecuredloadscanflyoffthe vehicle,particularlyathighspeeds,resultinginpersonalinjuryorpropertydamage.Followtheroofrack cautionswhencarryingcargoonyourroofrack.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CONTENTS

■INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES....214

■INSTRUMENT CLUSTER....215

■INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .216

■MINI-TRIP COMPUTER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . .230

□Control Buttons....231

■ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED .....232

☐Engine Oil Change Indicator System — If Equipped .....235

□EVIC Functions .....236

□Compass/Temperature/Audio....237

□Average Fuel Economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

□Distance To Empty (DTE)....237

□Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238

□Elapsed Time....238

□Display Units of Measure in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238

☐Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)....238

212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

■Uconnect® 230 — AM/FM STEREO RADIO AND 6-DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (MP3/WMA AUX JACK) .....244

□Operating Instructions - Radio Mode. . . . . . . .244

☐Operation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO)....253

☐LIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)....258

☐INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play) .....258

□Uconnect® (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped . . .260

■Uconnect® 730N/430/430N CD/DVD/ HDD/NAV — IF EQUIPPED....265

☐Operating Instructions (Voice Command System) — If Equipped .....265

□Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) — If Equipped .....265

■Uconnect® 130....265

□Operating Instructions — Radio Mode. . . . . . .266

☐Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play .....269

□Notes on Playing MP3 Files .....271

☐Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . .274

■Uconnect® 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO . . . . .275

□Operating Instructions — Radio Mode. . . . . . .275

☐Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

□Notes On Playing MP3 Files .....283

□LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) .....286

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

213

☐INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) .....287
□Uconnect® (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped . . .287

■iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED....292

□Connecting The iPod® Or External USB Device....292
□Using This Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
□Controlling The iPod® Or External USB Device Using Radio Buttons .....294
□Play Mode....294
□List Or Browse Mode....296
□Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA)....298

■STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS .....299

□Radio Operation....300
□CD Player....300

■CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE....301
■RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES....301
■CLIMATE CONTROLS....302

□Manual Heating And Air Conditioning .....302
□Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped .....306
□Operating Tips....312

214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES

Diagram of a car dashboard with numbered parts for identification and function

040107732

1 — Air Outlet 5 — Storage Bin 9 — Heated Seat Switch – If Equipped
2 — Demisters 6 — Glove Compartment 10 — Hazard Warning Flasher
3 — Instrument Cluster 7 — Climate Controls 11 — ESC OFF Switch - If Equipped
4 — Radio 8 — Power Outlet 12 — Heated Seat Switch – If Equipped

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 MPH RPM BRAKE NU 80 °F FN 101.9 P10 E F 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 221 242 263 284 295 306 327 348 369 391 412 433 454 475 496 517 538 559 581 602 623 644 665 686 707 728 749 771 792 813 834 855 876 897 918 939 961 982 993 1014 1035 1056 1077 1098 1119 1130

216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS

1.FuelGauge/FuelDoorReminder

When the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position, the pointer will show the level of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the vehicle where the fuel door is located.

2.ChargingSystemLight

This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle's non-essential electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If the charging system light remains on, it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.

If jump starting is required, refer to "Jump Starting Procedures" in "What To Do In Emergencies".

3.ElectronicThrottleControl(ETC)Light

This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If the light remains lit with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/RUN and remain

on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

4. Oil Pressure Warning Light

This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The should turn on momentarily when the engine is 1. If the light turns on while driving, stop the e and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A will sound when this light turns on.

Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.

5.LowFuelLight

When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.0 gal (7.8 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until added.

6.Speedometer

The Speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per hour (MPH) and kilometers per hour (km/h).

7. AirBagWarningLight

This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while

driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to "Occupant Restraints" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.

8. TurnSignalIndicators

The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated.

218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

If the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on, a continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the signals off. If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check for a defective outside light bulb.

9. HighBeamIndicator

This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction lever forward to switch the headlights to high beam, and pull toward yourself (normal position) to return to low beam.

10.Anti-LockBrake(ABS)Light

This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.

If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required. However,

the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.

If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.

11.SeatBeltReminderLight

When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver's seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver's seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound. Refer to "Occupant Restraints" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219

12.Tachometer

The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine revolutions-per-minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear range. Before reaching the red area, ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage.

13. Engine Temperature Warning Light

This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As engine coolant temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.

Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H, a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool or the 4 minutes duration is expired, whichever come first.

If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the

engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to "If Your Engine Overheats" in "What To Do In Emergencies" for further information.

14. Brake Warning Light

BRAKE

This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.

If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake

booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.

The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level.

The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.

NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake fluid level checked.

If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.

WARNING!

Drivingvehiclewiththeredbrakelightonis dangerous.Partofthebrakesystemmayhavefailed. Itwilltakelongertostopthevehicle.Youcouldhave acollision.Havethevehiclecheckedimmediately.

Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.

Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.

The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.

NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

1. Transmission Temperature Warning Light

This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop them vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off.

CAUTION!

ContinuousdrivingwiththeTransmissionTemperatureWarningLightilluminatedwilleventuallycauseseveretransmissiondamageortransmissionfailure.

WARNING!

If you continue operating the vehicle when the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to oil over, come in contact with hot engine exhaust components and cause a fire.

1. VehicleSecurityLight—IfEquipped

This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 16 seconds, when the vehicle security alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.

1. Temperature Gauge

The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.

222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.

CAUTION!

Drivingwithahotenginecoolingsystemcould damageyourvehicle.Ifthetemperaturegaugereads "H"pulloverandstopthevehicle.Idlethevehicle withtheairconditionerturnedoffuntilthepointer dropsbackintothenormalrange.Ifthepointer remainsonthe"H"andyouhearcontinuouschimes, turntheengineoffimmediatelyandcallanaauthorizeddealerforservice.

WARNING!

Ahotenginecoolingsystemisdangerous.Youor otherscouldbebadlyburnedbysteamorboiling coolant.Youmaywanttocallanauthorizeddealer forserviceifyourvehicleoverheats.Ifyoudecideto lookunderthehoodyourself,see“MaintainingYour Vehicle”.FollowthewarningsundertheCooling SystemPressureCappagraph.

1. CruiseIndicator—IfEquipped

CRUISE This indicator shows that the Electronic Speed Control System is ON.

19.4WDIndicator—IfEquipped

This light indicates the vehicle is in the 4-Wheel Drive mode.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223

20.ShiftLeverIndicator

The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission.

NOTE: You must apply the brakes before shifting from PARK.

21.Odometer/TripOdometerResetButton

Press this button to change the display from odometer to either of the two trip odometer settings. Trip A or Trip B will appear when in the trip odometer mode. Push in and hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles or kilometers. The odometer must be in Trip mode to reset.

22. TirePressureMonitoringTelltaleLight

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended

by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to

maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the

replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

CAUTION!

TheTPMShasbeenoptimizedfortheoriginal equipmenttiresandwheels.TPMSpressuresand warninghavebeenestablishedforthetiresize equippedonyourvehicle.Undesirable systemoperationorsensordamagemayresultwhenusingreplacementequipmentthatisnotofthesamesize, type,and/orstyle.Aftermarketwheelscancause sensordamage.Donotusetiresealantfromacanor balancebeadsifyourvehicleisequippedwitha TPMS,asdamagetothesensorsmayresult.

23.OdometerDisplay/TripOdometerDisplayArea

This display indicates the total distance the vehicle has been driven.

NOTE: U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero.

VehicleOdometerMessages

When the appropriate conditions exist, the following odometer messages will display:

door. .... Door Ajar

gATE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gate Ajar

gASCAP.... Fuel Cap Fault

LoWtirE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Tire Pre

CHANgEOIL....Oil Change Required

HOTOIL. . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Oil Temp Too Hot

NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with the optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in the instrument cluster, all warnings including "Door Ajar", and "Gate Ajar" will only be displayed in the EVIC display. For additional information, refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center — If Equipped".

226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

gASCAP

If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a "gASCAP" message will display in the odometer display area. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the problem continues, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started.

A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).

LoWtirE

When tire pressure is low, the odometer display will toggle between LoW and tirE for three cycles.

HOTOIL

When this message is displayed there is a engine over-temperature condition. When this condition occurs, the "HOTOIL" message will be displayed in the odometer along with a chime.

Refer to "Engine Oil Overheating" under in "What To Do In Emergencies".

CHANgEOILMessage

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The "CHANgE OIL" message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty-cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style. Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster. To reset the oil change indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the following procedure:

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.

NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start the engine, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.

24.MalfunctionIndicatorLight(MIL)

The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of an Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II that monitors emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.

Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.

CAUTION!

ProlongeddrivingwiththeMalfunctionIndicator Light(MIL)oncouldcausedamagetotheengine controlsystem.Italsocouldaffectfueleconomyand drivability.IftheMILisflashing,severecatalytic converterdamageandpowerlosswillsoonoccur. Immediateserviceisrequired.

WARNING!

Amalfunctioningcatalyticconverter,asreferenced above,canreachhighertemperaturesthaninnormal operatingconditions.Thiscancauseafireifyou driveslowlyorparkoverflammablesubstancessuch asdryplants,wood,cardboard,etc.Thiscouldresult indeathorseriousinjurytothedriver,occupantsor others.

25.FrontFogLightIndicator—IfEquipped

This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.

26.ElectronicStabilityControl(ESC)OFFIndicator Light—IfEquipped

This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control system (ESC) has been turned off by the driver.

1. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light—If Equipped

The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position. It should go out with the engine running. If the "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.

NOTE:

• The "ESC Off Indicator Light" and the "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation.

28.4WD!WarningLight—IfEquipped

This light monitors the 4-Wheel Drive (4WD) system. The light will come on, for a bulb check, when the ignition key is turned to the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long s three seconds.

Whenlitsolid: There is a 4WD system fault. 4WD performance will be at a reduced level. Service the 4WD system soon.

Whenblinking:The 4WD system is temporarily disabled due to overload condition.

230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

1. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display—If Equipped

When the appropriate conditions exist, this display shows the EVIC messages.

For further information, refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)".

30.HillDescentIndicator—IfEquipped

The symbol illuminates (is armed) when the 4WD Lock switch is activated and the transmission range indicator is in LOW or REVERSE position (Off-Road Mode).

MINI-TRIP COMPUTER — IF EQUIPPED

The Mini-Trip Computer is located in the instrument cluster and features a driver-interactive trip information and temperature display.

NOTE: The system will display the last known outside temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated temperature is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.

Control Buttons STEPButton

STEP RESET

040541179

Mini-TripControlButtons

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231

Press the STEP button located on the steering wheel to scroll through sub menus (i.e., Temperature, Trip Functions: Odometer, Trip A, Trip B).

RESETButton

To reset the display shown, turn the ignition switch to the ON position, then press and hold the RESET button located on the steering wheel.

The following displays can be reset or changed:

• Trip A
• Trip B

232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

TripOdometer(ODO)

This display shows the distance traveled since the last reset. Press and release the STEP button on the instrument cluster to switch from odometer, to Trip A or Trip B.

TripA

Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset.

TripB

Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset.

ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED

The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster.

041035271 041035271

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233

The EVIC consists of the following:

• System Status
• Units
  • Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays
• Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
• Compass Heading
  • Outside Temperature Display
• Trip Computer Functions
• Uconnect® phone Displays (if equipped)
• Audio Mode Display
  • Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)

The system allows the driver to select information by pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel:

VR MENU N

EVICSteeringWheelButtons

041035449

234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

MENUButton

MENU

Press and release the MENU button to scroll through the main menus (Fuel Economy, Warnings, Timer, Units, System, Personal Settings) or to exit sub-menus.

COMPASSButton

Press and release the COMPASS button to display one of eight compass readings and the outside temperature or to exit sub-menus.

SELECTButton

Press and release the SELECT button for access to main menus, sub-menus or to select a personal setting in the setup menu.

DOWNButton

Press and release the DOWN button to scroll downward through the sub-menus.

When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays the following messages:

• Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime after 1 mile (1.6 km) of distance travelled)
  • Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
• Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)

• Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
  • Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
  •RKE Battery Low (with a single chime)

• Personal Settings Not Avail. — Vehicle not in PARK (automatic transmission) or vehicle is in motion (manual transmission).

• Door Ajar (with vehicle graphic showing which door is open. A single chime sounds if the vehicle is in motion).
• Doors Ajar (with vehicle graphic showing which doors are open. A single chime sounds if the vehicle is in motion).
• Gate (with vehicle graphic showing the Liftgate open and A single chime)
  • Headlamps or Park Lamps On
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar

• Remote Start Aborted — L/Gate Ajar

• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low

• Remote Start Aborted — System Fault
  •Key In Ignition
• Low Tire
• Low Tire Pressure Display for Premium TPM System
  •Service TPM System

Engine Oil Change Indicator System — If Equipped

OilChangeRequired

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The "Oil Change Required" message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately five seconds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change

236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

indicator system is duty-cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style.

Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster. To reset the oil change indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the following procedure.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Donot starttheengine.
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.

NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If necessary repeat this procedure.

EVIC Functions

• Compass/Temperature/Audio
  • Average Fuel Economy
  • Distance To Empty (DTE)
• Units In
• Elapsed Time
  • Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
• Personal Settings

ToResetTheDisplay

Pressing and holding the SELECT button once will clear the function currently being displayed. Reset will only occur if a resettable function is currently being displayed. To reset all resettable functions, press and release the SELECT button a second time within three seconds of resetting the currently displayed function. Reset ALL will be displayed during this three-second window.

Compass/Temperature/Audio

Press and release the COMPASS button to display one of eight compass headings to indicate the direction the vehicle is facing, the outside temperature, and the current radio station.

For additional information regarding the compass, refer to Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features).

Average Fuel Economy

Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read "RESET" or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the history information will be erased, and the averaging will continue from the last fuel reading before the reset.

Distance To Empty (DTE)

Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel tank level. This is not resettable.

NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.

238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km) estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change to a text display of "LOW FUEL". This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the "LOW FUEL" text and a new DTE value will be displayed, based on the current values in the DTE calculation and the current fuel tank level.

Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)

Refer to "Starting And Operating", "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" for system operation.

Elapsed Time

Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset. Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the RUN/START position.

Elapsed time is displayed as follows:

hours:minutes:seconds

Elapsed time can be reset by pressing and holding the SELECT button (as prompted in the EVIC display). Upon reset all digits will change to zeros and time will start incrementing again if the ignition switch is in RUN or START.

Display Units of Measure in

To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until "ENGLISH" or "METRIC" appears.

Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)

This allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK (automatic transmission) or the vehicle is stopped (manual transmission).

Press and release the MENU or DOWN buttons until "Personal Settings" is displayed in the EVIC then press the SELECT button.

Use the SELECT button to display one of the following choices:

Language

When in this display you may select different languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions. Pressing the SELECT button while in this display selects English, Espanol, Deutsch, Italiano, Francais or NL depending on availability. As you continue, the displayed information will be shown in the selected language.

NOTE:Uconnect® language will not change using the EVIC. Please refer to "Language Selection" in Uconnect® phone — If Equipped for details.

AutoLockDoors

When ON is selected, all doors lock automatically when the speed of the vehicle reaches 15 mph (24 km/h). Press and hold the SELECT button when in this display until "ON" or "OFF" appears to make your selection.

AutoUnlockOnExit

When ON is selected, all the vehicle's doors will unlock when the driver's door is opened, if the vehicle is stopped (manual transmission) or the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position (automatic transmission). Press and hold the SELECT button when in this display until "ON" or "OFF" appears to make your selection.

RKEUnlock

When Driver's Door 1st is selected only the driver's door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button and require a second

240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

press to unlock the remaining locked doors. When Remote Unlock All Doors is selected, all of the doors will unlock at the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. Press and hold the SELECT button when in this display until "Driver's Door 1st" or "All Doors" appears to make your selection.

FlashLampswithLock

When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked using the RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn with lock feature selected. Press and hold the SELECT button when in this display until "ON" or "OFF" appears to make your selection.

SoundHornwithLock

When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This feature may be selected with or without the Flash Lights with Lock feature. Press and hold the SELECT button when in this display until "ON" or "OFF" appears to make your selection.

HeadlampOffDelay

When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. Press and hold the SELECT button when in this display until 0, 30, 60, or 90 appears to make your selection.

KeyOffPowerDelay

When this feature is selected the power window switches, radio, Uconnect® phone, power sunroof, and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF. Opening either front vehicle door will cancel this feature. Press and hold the SELECT button when in this display until "OFF", "45 sec.", "5 min.", or "10 min." appears to make your selection.

IlluminatedApproach

When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked using the RKE transmitter. Press and hold the SELECT button when in this display until "OFF", "30 sec.", "60 sec.", or "90 sec." appears to make your selection.

HillStartAssist(HSA)—IfEquipped

When on is selected, the HSA system is active. Refer to "Electronic Brake Control System" in "Starting And Operating" for system function and operating information. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT button until "On" or "Off" appears.

DisplayUnitsIn

The EVIC, odometer, and Uconnect® gps system units can be changed between English and Metric.

Press and hold the SELECT button when in this display until "ENGLISH" or "METRIC" appears to make your selection.

AutomaticCompassCalibration

This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to set the compass manually. When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display "CAL" until the compass is calibrated. You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects) until the "CAL" message displayed in the EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally.

NOTE:A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks, etc.

242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

ManualCompassCalibration

If the compass appears erratic and the "CAL" indicator does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows:

1. Start the engine. Leave the shift lever in PARK in order to enter the EVIC Programming Menus.
2. Press the MENU button until the Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features) menu displays in the EVIC.
3. Press the DOWN button until "Calibrate Compass" displays in the EVIC.

4. Press and release the SELECT button to start the calibration. The "CAL" indicator will display in the EVIC.

5. Complete one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects) until the "CAL" indicator turns off. The compass will now function normally.

CompassVariance

Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North. To compensate for the differences, the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly set, the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass heading.

NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from the top of the right rear quarter window. This is where the compass sensor is located.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 040506040

CompassVarianceMap

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243

1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Press and hold the COMPASS button for approximately two seconds.
3. Press the DOWN button until "Compass Variance" message and the last variance zone number displays in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the SELECT button until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map.
5. Press and release the COMPASS button to exit.

244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Uconnect® 230 — AM/FM STEREO RADIO AND 6-DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (MP3/WMA AUX JACK)

SEEK SEEK SCAN TIME INFO RW FF & DISC - MP3 - WMA PUSH ON AM/FM SAT DISC VOLUME SIRIUS LIST MUSIC TYPE SETUP TUNE/SCROLL SET 1 2 3 4 5 6 AUX AUX

042040029

Uconnect®230

Operating Instructions - Radio Mode

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio.

PowerSwitch/VolumeControl(Rotary)

Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio. Press the ON/VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio.

ElectronicVolumeControl

The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it.

When the audio system is turned ON, the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245

SEEKButtons

Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection. Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping, until you release it.

SCANButton

Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM, FM or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN button a second time.

VoiceCommandButtonUconnect®Phone—IfEquipped

Press this button to operate the Uconnect® Phone feature (if equipped). Refer to "Voice Command" for further details.

If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle, a "Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone" message will display on the radio screen.

PhoneButtonUconnect®Phone—IfEquipped

Press this button to operate the Uconnect® Phone feature (if equipped). Refer to "Uconnect® Phone" for further details.

If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle, a "Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone" message will display on the radio screen.

246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

TIMEButton

Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time and frequency display.

ClockSettingProcedure

1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to save the time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.

The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and selecting the "SET HOME CLOCK" entry. Once in this display follow the above procedure, starting at step 2.

INFOButton

Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).

RW/FF

Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows. This feature operates in AM, FM or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247

TUNEControl

Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.

SettingtheTone,Balance,andFade

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid-range tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone, balance, and fade.

MUSICTYPEButton

Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information.

Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types:

ProgramType	16-DigitCharacter Display
No program type or undefined	None
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Classical Classicl
Classic Rock Cls Rock
College College
Country Country
Foreign Language Language
Information Inform
Jazz Jazz
News News
Nostalgia Nostalga

ProgramType	16-DigitCharacter Display
Oldies Oldies
Personality Persnity
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues R & B
Religious Music	Rel Musc
Religious Talk	Rel Talk
Rock	Rock
Soft	Soft
Soft Rock	Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues	Soft R & B
Sports	Sports
Talk	Talk
Top 40	Top 40
Weather	Weather

By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name. The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode.

If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type (Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.

SETUPButton

Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items:

NOTE: Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll through the entries. Push the AUDIO/SELECT button to select an entry and make changes.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249

- DVDEnter-When the disc is in DVD Menu mode, selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current highlighted selection. Use the remote control to scroll up and down the menu (if equipped).

•DISCPlay/Pause-

You can toggle between playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by pushing the SELECT button (if equipped).

- DVDPlayOptions-Selecting the DVD Play Options will display the following:

• Subtitle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch subtitles to different subtitle languages that are available on the disc (if equipped).
• Audio Stream – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch to different audio languages (if supported on the disc) (if equipped).

250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

- Angle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc (if equipped).

NOTE:

• The available selections for each of the above entries varies depending upon the disc.
  • These selections can only be made while playing a DVD.
• VESTM Power - Allows you to turn VESTM ON and OFF (if equipped).
• VES™ Lock - Locks out rear VES™ remote controls (if equipped).

• VES™ CH1/CH2 - Allows the user to change the mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by pressing the AUDIO/SELECT button (if equipped).

• SetHomeClock-Pressing the SELECT button allows you to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to save changes.

• PlayerDefaults-Selecting this item will allow the user to scroll through the following items and set defaults according to customer preference.

MenuLanguage—IfEquipped

Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the default startup DVD menu language (effective only if language supported by disc). If you want to select a language not listed, then scroll down and select "other." Enter the four-digit country code using the TUNE/ SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select.

AudioLanguage—IfEquipped

Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio language (effective only if the language is supported by the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting "other." Enter the country code using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select.

SubtitleLanguage—IfEquipped

Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle language (effective only if the language is supported by the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting "other." Enter the country code using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select.

Subtitles—IfEquipped

Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle Off or On.

AudioDRC—IfEquipped

Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio dynamic range. The default is set to "High," and under this setting, dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the setting is "Normal."

AspectRatio—IfEquipped

Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide screen, pan scan, and letter box.

AutoPlay—IfEquipped

When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted, it will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the movie. In some rare cases, the DVD player may not auto-play the main title. In such cases, use the MENU button on the remote control to select desired title to play.

252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: The user will have to set these defaults before loading a disc. If changes are made to these settings after a disc is loaded, changes will not be effective. Also, the defaults are effective only if the disc supports the customer-preferred settings.

AMandFMButtons

Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode.

SETButton—ToSetthePushbuttonMemory

When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory.

You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM, and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button number will display.

Buttons 1 - 6

These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations}.

DISCButton

Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM/FM modes to Disc modes.

Operation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO)

The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region. These region codes must match in order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD player, it will not play the disc. Customers may take their vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code of the player a maximum of five times.

CAUTION!

Theradiomayshutdownduringextremelyhot conditions. Whenthisoccurs, theradiowillindicate "DiscHot" and shutofffuntilasafetemperature is reached. This shutdownisnecessarytoprotectthe opticsoftheDVDplayerandotherradiointernal components.

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio.

LOADButton—LoadingCompactDisc(s)

Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number (1-6) where the CD is being loaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays "INSERT DISC," insert the CD into the player.

254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Radio display will show "LOADING DISC" when the disc is loading and "READING DISC" when the radio is reading the disc.

CAUTION!

ThisCDplayerwillaccept4-3/4in(12cm)discsonly. TheuseofothersizeddiscsmaydamagetheCD playermechanism.

EjectButton—EjectingCompactDisc(s)

Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number (1-6) where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal. Radio display will show "EJECTING DISC" when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.

Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio.

The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.

SEEKButton(CDMODE)

Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in CD and MP3/MWA modes.

SCANButton(CDMODE)

Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing.

TIMEButton(CDMODE)

Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display.

RW/FF(CDMODE)

Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Rewind) button works in a similar manner.

AMorFMButton(CDMODE)

Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode.

NotesOnPlayingMP3/WMAFiles

The radio can play MP3/WMA files; however, acceptable MP3/WMA file recording media and formats are limited. When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to the following restrictions.

SupportedMedia(DiscTypes)

The MP3/WMA file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, WMA, DVD Video, DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, and CDDA+MP3.

SupportedMediumFormats(FileSystems)

The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.

The radio uses the following limits for file systems:

• Maximum number of directory levels: 8
• Maximum number of files: 255
• Maximum number of folders: 100

256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:

• Level 1: 12 (including a separator "." and a three-character extension)
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator "." and a three-character extension)

Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/WMA files). Discs created with an option such as "keep disc open after writing" are most likely multisession discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times.

If a disc contains multi-formats, such as CD audio and MP3/WMA tracks, the radio will only play the MP3/WMA tracks on that disc.

SupportedMP3/WMAFileFormats

The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3/WMA extension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA files named with the *.MP3/WMA extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file.

When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audio data to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported. In addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3/WMA files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257

MPEG Specification	Sampling Frequency (kHz)	BitRate(kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3	48, 44.1, 32 320	256, 224, 192, 160, 128, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48
MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3	24, 22.05, 16 160	128, 144, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48

WMA Specification	Sampling Frequency (kHz)	BitRate(kbps)
WMA 44.1 and 48 48, 64, 96, 128,		160, 192 VBR

ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title are supported for ID3 version 1 tags. ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios.

Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not supported.

PlaybackofMP3/WMAFiles

When a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded, the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3/WMA files.

Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may be affected by the following:

• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than CD-R media
- Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer to load than non-multisession discs

258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

- Number of files and folders - Loading times will increase with more files and folders

To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a single-session disc, enable the "Disc at Once" option before writing to the disc.

LIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)

Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files).

The folder list will time out after five seconds.

INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)

Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if available).

Press the INFO button once more to return to "elapsed time" priority mode.

Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file.

Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to "elapsed time" display.

OperationInstructions-AuxiliaryMode

The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3/WMA player, cassette player, or microphone and utilize the vehicle's audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259

Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.

NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the device's volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio is not loud enough, turn the device's volume up. If the AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device's volume down.

SEEKButton(AuxiliaryMode)

No function.

SCANButton(AuxiliaryMode)

No function.

EJECTButton(AuxiliaryMode)

No function.

TIMEButton(AuxiliaryMode)

Press the TIME button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day. The time of day will display for five seconds.

RW/FF(AuxiliaryMode)

No function.

SETButton(AuxiliaryMode)

No function.

OperatingInstructions—VoiceCommandSystem (IfEquipped)

Refer to "Voice Command" for further details.

OperatingInstructions-Uconnect®Phone (IfEquipped)

Refer to "Uconnect® Phone" for further details.

260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

OperatingInstructions-VideoEntertainment System(VES™)(IfEquipped)

Refer to "Video Entertainment System (VES™)" for further details.

Dolby®

Manufactured under license from Dolby® Laboratories. Dolby® and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby® Laboratories.

Macrovision

This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

DTS ^TM

"DTS ^TM and "DTS ^TM 2.0" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

Uconnect® (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped

Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music, sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.

NOTE:Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska.

SystemActivation

Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory-installed satellite radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that contains general information, including how to setup your on-line listening account. For further information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.

ElectronicSerialNumber/SiriusIdentification Number(ESN/SID)

Please have the following information available when calling:

1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.

To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:

ESN/SIDAccess

With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC position and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on the radio to exit this screen.

SelectingUconnect®(Satellite)Mode

Press the SAT button until "SAT" appears in the display. A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode.

SatelliteAntenna

To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause

262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly on or above the antenna.

ReceptionQuality

Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons:

• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle.
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes.
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception.
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage.

OperatingInstructions-Uconnect®(Satellite) Mode

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC position to operate the radio.

SEEKButtons

Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection. Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it.

SCANButton

Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN button a second time.

INFOButton

Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display information between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if available). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return to normal display).

RW/FF

Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows.

TUNEControl(Rotary)

Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.

MUSICTYPEButton

Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be selected.

Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type.

By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name.

If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type (Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.

264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SETUPButton

Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items:

- Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/ SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the Sirius subscription.

SET/RNDButton—ToSetthePushbutton Memory

When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory.

You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button number will display.

Buttons 1 - 6

These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).

Uconnect® 730N/430/430N CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — IF EQUIPPED

Refer to your Uconnect® user's manual for detailed operating instructions.

Operating Instructions (Voice Command System) — If Equipped

Refer to "Voice Command" for further details.

Operating Instructions (Uconnect® Phone) — If Equipped

Refer to "Uconnect® Phone" for further details.

Uconnect® 130

M#SEEK SEEKM AM/FN DISC AUX ← RW FF → TIME SINGLE DISC - VPS PUSH ON: VOLUME 1 2 3 4 5 6 SET END PUSH AUDIO/SELECT TONE/SCROLL AUX 000

042305232

Uconnect®130

266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Operating Instructions — Radio Mode

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio.

PowerSwitch/VolumeControl(Rotary)

Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio.

ElectronicVolumeControl

The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume, and to the left decreases it.

When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played.

SEEKButtons

Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection. Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping, until you release it.

TIMEButton

Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency.

ClockSettingProcedure

1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.

2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ SCROLL control knob.

3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink.

4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.

RW/FF

Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies.

TUNEControl

Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.

SettingtheTone,Balance,andFade

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid-range tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.

268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone, balance, and fade.

AM/FMButton

Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.

SET/RNDButton—ToSetthePushbutton Memory

When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the

SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory.

You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button number will display.

Buttons 1 - 6

These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM stations).

DISCButton

Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM/FM modes to Disc modes.

Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play

NOTE:

• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.

InsertingCompactDisc(s)

Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded.

If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will show the track number, and index time in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.

CAUTION!

• ThisCDplayerwillaccept4–3/4in(12cm)discs only. Theuseofothersizeddiscsmaydamagethe CDplayermechanism.
• Donotuseadhesivelabels. Theselabelscanpeel awayandjamtheplayermechanism.
• TheUconnect®130isasingleCDplayer.Donot attempttoinsertasecondCDifoneisalready loaded.
• Dual-mediadisctypes(onesideisaDVD,the othersideisaCD)shouldnotbeused,andtheycan causedamagetotheplayer.

EJECTButton-EjectingaCD

Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.

If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.

A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.

NOTE:Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).

SEEKButton

Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of

the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes.

TIMEButton

Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display.

RW/FF

Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button works in a similar manner.

AM/FMButton

Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.

SET/RNDButton(RandomPlayButton)

Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace.

Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.

Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play.

Notes on Playing MP3 Files

The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited. When writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.

272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SupportedMedia(DiscTypes)

The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.

SupportedMediumFormats(FileSystems)

The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.

The radio uses the following limits for file systems:

• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
•Maximum number of files: 255
- Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file names and folder names is limited. For large numbers of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to

display the file name and folder name, and will assign a number instead. With a maximum number of files, exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With 200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this display.)

• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:

• Level 1: 12 (including a separator "." and a three-character extension)
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator "." and a three-character extension)

Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files). Discs created with an option such as "keep disc open after writing" are most likely multisession discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times.

SupportedMP3FileFormats

The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3 extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file.

When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported. In addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rate.

MPEG Specification	Sampling Frequency (kHz)	BitRate(kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3	48, 44.1, 32 320,	256, 224, 192, 160, 128, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3	24, 22.05, 16 160,	128, 144, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32, 24, 16, 8

ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios.

Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not supported.

274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

PlaybackofMP3Files

When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files.

Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following:

• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than CD-R media
- Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer to load than non-multisession discs
- Number of files and folders - Loading times will increase with more files and folders

To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option before writing to the disc.

Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode

The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an MP3 player, or iPod®, and utilize the vehicle's audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers.

Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.

NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the device's volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is not loud enough, turn the device's volume up. If the AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device's volume down.

TIMEButton(AuxiliaryMode)

Press this button to change the display to time of day. The time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is OFF).

Uconnect® 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO

MSEEK SEEKM INFO RW IF TIME SINGLE DISC MP3 PUSH ON AM/FM LIST PUSH AUDIO/SELECT SAT MUSIC TYPE DISC AUX SETUP VOLUME 1 2 3 4 5 6 SET END AUX

042340030

Uconnect®130

Operating Instructions — Radio Mode

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio.

PowerSwitch/VolumeControl(Rotary)

Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio.

ElectronicVolumeControl

The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume, and to the left decreases it.

When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played.

276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SEEKButtons

Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection. Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping, until you release it.

VoiceCommandSystem(Radio)—IfEquipped

Refer to "Voice Command" in "Understanding The Features If Your Vehicle".

VoiceCommandButtonUconnect®Phone—IfEquipped

Press this button to operate the Uconnect® Phone feature (if equipped). Refer to "Uconnect® Phone" in "Understanding The Features If Your Vehicle".

If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle, a "Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone" message will display on the radio screen.

PhoneButtonUconnect®Phone—IfEquipped

Press this button to operate the Uconnect® Phone feature (if equipped). Refer to "Uconnect® Phone" in "Understanding The Features If Your Vehicle".

If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio screen.

TIMEButton

Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency.

ClockSettingProcedure

1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.

The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button. For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,

starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure, starting at Step 2.

INFOButton

Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).

RW/FF

Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies.

TUNEControl

Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.

278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SettingtheTone,Balance,andFade

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid-range tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone, balance, and fade.

MUSICTYPEButton

Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information.

Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types:

ProgramType	16-DigitCharacter Display
No program type or undefined	None
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Classical Classicl
Classic Rock Cls Rock
College College
Country Country
Foreign Language Language
Information Inform
Jazz Jazz
News News
Nostalgia Nostalga

ProgramType	16-DigitCharacter Display
Oldies Oldies
Personality Persnity
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues R & B
Religious Music	Rel Musc
Religious Talk	Rel Talk
Rock	Rock
Soft	Soft
Soft Rock	Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues	Soft R&B
Sports	Sports
Talk	Talk
Top 40	Top 40
Weather	Weather

280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name. The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode.

If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type (Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.

SETUPButton

Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items:

- SetClock—Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust

the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to save time change.

AM/FMButton

Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.

SET/RNDButton—ToSetthePushbutton Memory

When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory.

You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button number will display.

Buttons 1 - 6

These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM stations).

DISC/AUXButton

Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.

Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play

NOTE:

• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.

InsertingCompactDisc(s)

Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded.

282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will show the track number, and index time in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.

CAUTION!

• ThisCDplayerwillaccept4–3/4in(12cm)discs only. Theuseofothersizeddiscsmaydamagethe CDplayermechanism.
• Donotuseadhesivelabels. Theselabelscanpeel awayandjamtheplayermechanism.
• TheUconnect®130isasingleCDplayer.Donot attempttoinsertasecondCDifoneisalready loaded.

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

- Dual-mediadisctypes(onesideisaDVD,the othersideisaCD)shouldnotbeused,andtheycan causedamagetotheplayer.

EJECTButton-EjectingaCD

Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.

If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.

A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.

NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).

SEEKButton

Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes.

TIMEButton

Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display.

RW/FF

Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button works in a similar manner.

AM/FMButton

Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.

SET/RNDButton(RandomPlayButton)

Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace.

Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.

Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Random Play.

Notes On Playing MP3 Files

The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited. When writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.

284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SupportedMedia(DiscTypes)

The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.

SupportedMediumFormats(FileSystems)

The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.

The radio uses the following limits for file systems:

• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
•Maximum number of files: 255
- Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file names and folder names is limited. For large numbers of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to

display the file name and folder name, and will assign a number instead. With a maximum number of files, exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With 200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this display.)

• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:

• Level 1: 12 (including a separator "." and a three-character extension)
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator "." and a three-character extension)

Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files). Discs created with an option such as "keep disc open after writing" are most likely multisession discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times.

SupportedMP3FileFormats

The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3 extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file.

When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported. In addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.

MPEG Specification	Sampling Frequency (kHz)	BitRate(kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3	48, 44.1, 32 320,	256, 224, 192, 160, 128, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3	24, 22.05, 16 160,	128, 144, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32, 24, 16, 8

ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios.

Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not supported.

286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

PlaybackofMP3Files

When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files.

Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following:

• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than CD-R media
- Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer to load than non-multisession discs
- Number of files and folders - Loading times will increase with more files and folders

To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option before writing to the disc.

LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)

Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files).

The folder list will time out after five seconds.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287

INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)

Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if available).

Press the INFO button once more to return to "elapsed time" priority mode.

Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file.

Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to "elapsed time" display.

OperationInstructions-AuxiliaryMode

The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or iPod® and utilize the vehicle's audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers.

Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.

NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the device's volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio is not loud enough, turn the device's volume up. If the AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device's volume down.

TIMEButton(AuxiliaryMode)

Press this button to change the display to time of day. The time of day will display for five seconds (when the ignition is OFF).

Uconnect® (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped

Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,

288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.

NOTE:Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska.

SystemActivation

Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory-installed satellite radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that contains general information, including how to setup your on-line listening account. For further information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.

ElectronicSerialNumber/SiriusIdentification Number(ESN/SID)

Please have the following information available when calling:

1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number (ESN/SID).

2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.

To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:

ESN/SIDAccess

With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC position and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on the radio to exit this screen.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289

SelectingUconnect®(Satellite)Mode

Press the SAT button until "SAT" appears in the display. A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode.

SatelliteAntenna

To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly on or above the antenna.

ReceptionQuality

Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons:

- The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle.

• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes.
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception.
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage.

OperatingInstructions-Uconnect®(Satellite) Mode

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC position to operate the radio.

SEEKButtons

Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will

290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection. Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it.

SCANButton

Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN button a second time.

INFOButton

Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display information between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if available). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return to normal display).

RW/FF

Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows.

TUNEControl(Rotary)

Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.

MUSICTYPEButton

Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be selected.

Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type.

By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name.

If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type (Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.

SETUPButton

Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items:

- Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/ SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the Sirius subscription.

SETButton-ToSetthePushbuttonMemory

When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.

Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory.

You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button number will display.

292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Buttons 1 - 6

These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).

OperatingInstructions-Uconnect®Phone (IfEquipped)

Refer to "Uconnect® Phone" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle".

iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED

This feature allows an iPod® or external USB device to be plugged into the USB port, located in the center console or glove compartment.

iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod® and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please visit Apple's website for software updates.

NOTE:

• If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriate Uconnect® Multimedia radio User's Manual for iPod® or external USB device support capability.
• Connecting an iPod® or consumer electronic audio device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate, plays media, but does not use the iPod® /MP3 control feature to control the connected device.

Connecting The iPod® Or External USB Device

Use the connection cable to connect an iPod® or external USB device to the vehicle's USB/AUX connector port which is located in the center console or glove compartment.

AUX

044136844

USB/AUXConnectorPort

Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to the vehicle's iPod®/USB/MP3 control system (iPod® or external USB device may take a few minutes to connect), the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches, as described below.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293

NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely discharged, it may not communicate with the iPod®/USB/MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained. Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod®/USB/MP3 control system may charge it to the required level.

Using This Feature

By using an iPod® cable, or an external USB device to connect to the USB port:

• The audio device can be played on the vehicle's sound system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.) information on the radio display.
• The audio device can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod® contents.
• The audio device battery charges when plugged into the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific audio device).

294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Controlling The iPod® Or External USB Device Using Radio Buttons

To get into the iPod®/USB/MP3 control mode and access a connected audio device, either press the "AUX" button on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and say "USB" or "Switch to USB". Once in the iPod®/USB/MP3 control mode, audio tracks (if available from audio device) start playing over the vehicle's audio system.

Play Mode

When switched to iPod®/USB/MP3 control mode, the iPod® or external USB device automatically starts Play mode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio faceplate may be used to control the iPod® or external USB device and display data:

- Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or previous track.

• Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while playing a track, skips to the next track or press the VR button and say "Next Track".

• Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one click, will jump to the previous track in the list or press the VR button and say "Previous Track"

• Jump backward in the current track by pressing and holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW button long enough will jump to the beginning of the current track.

• Jump forward in the current track by pressing and holding the FF>> button.
• A single press backward << RW or forward FF>> will jump backward or forward respectively, for five seconds.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295

• Use the << SEEK and SEEK>> buttons to jump to the previous or next track. Pressing the SEEK>> button during play mode will jump to the next track in the list, or press the VR button and say "Next or Previous Track".
• While a track is playing, press the INFObutton to see the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.) for that track. Pressing the INFObutton again jumps to the next screen of data for that track. Once all screens have been viewed, the last INFObutton press will go back to the play mode screen on the radio.
• Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio device mode to repeat the current playing track or press the VR button and say "Repeat ON" or "Repeat Off".

- Press the SCANbutton to use iPod®/USB/MP3 device scan mode, which will play the first 10 seconds of each track in the current list and then forward to the next song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the desired track, when it is playing the track, press the SCANbutton again. During Scan mode, pressing the << SEEK and SEEK>> buttons will select the previous and next tracks.

- RNDbutton (available on sales code RES radio only): Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod® or external USB device, or press the VR button and say "Shuffle ON" or "Shuffle Off". If the RND icon is showing on the radio display, then the shuffle mode is ON.

296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

List Or Browse Mode

During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the audio device.

• TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio device or external USB device.

• Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockwise (backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying the track detail on the radio display. Once the track to be played is highlighted on the radio display, press the TUNEcontrol knob to select and start playing the track. Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll through the list faster. During fast scroll, a slight delay in updating the information on the radio display may be noticeable.

• During all List modes, the iPod® displays all lists in "wrap-around" mode. So if the track is at the bottom of the list, just turn the wheel backward (counterclockwise) to get to the track faster.

• In List mode, the radio PRESETbuttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod® or external USB device.
• Preset 1 – Playlists
• Preset 2 – Artists
• Preset 3 – Albums
• Preset 4 – Genres
• Preset 5 – Audiobooks
• Preset 6 – Podcasts

• Pressing a PRESET button will display the current list on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line.

• To exit List mode without selecting a track, press the same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode.

• LIST button: The LIST button will display the top level menu of the iPod® or external USB device. Turn the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item to be selected and press the TUNEcontrol knob. This will display the next sub-menu list item on the audio device, then follow the same steps to go to the desired track in that list. Not all iPod® or external USB device sub-menu levels are available on this system.
• MUSICTYPEbutton: The MUSICTYPEbutton is another shortcut button to the genre listing on your audio device.

CAUTION!

• LeavingtheiPod®orexternalUSBdevice(orany supporteddevice)anywhereinthevehicleinextremeheatorcoldcanaltertheoperationordamage thedevice.Followthedevicemanufacturer'sguidelines.
• PlacingitemsontheiPod®orexternalUSBdevice, orconnectionstotheiPod®orexternalUSBdevice inthevehicle, cancausedamagetothedevice and/ortotheconnectors.

WARNING!

DonotpluginorremovetheiPod®orexternalUSB devicewhiledriving.Failureretofollowthiswarning couldresultinanaccident.

298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA)

Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the Uconnect® phone system.

ControllingBTSAUsingRadioButtons

To get into the BTSA mode, press either "AUX" button on the radio or press the VR button and say "Bluetooth Streaming Audio".

PlayMode

When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can start playing music over the vehicle's audio system, but some devices require the music to be initiated on the device first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect® phone system. Seven devices can be paired to the Uconnect® phone system, but just one can be selected and played.

SelectingADifferentAudioDevice

1. Press the PHONE button to begin.
2. After the "Ready" prompt and following the beep, say "Setup", then say "Select Audio Devices".
3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the Uconnect® phone system to list the audio devices.

NextTrack

Use the SEEK UP button, or press the VR button on the radio and say "Next Track", to jump to the next music track on your cellular phone.

PreviousTrack

Use the SEEK DOWN button, or press the VR button on the radio and say "Previous Track", to jump to the previous music track on your cellular phone.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299

Browse

Browsing is not available on a Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) device. Only the current song that is playing will display info.

STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS

The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to access the switches.

Top-down view of a car steering wheel with three directional arrows indicating clockwise motion (no text or symbols)

045033001

RemoteSoundSystemControls (BackViewOfSteeringWheel)

The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.

300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Pressing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/CD/HDD/AUX/VES, etc.).

The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand control is different depending on which mode you are in.

The following describes the left-hand control operation in each mode.

Radio Operation

Pressing the top of the switch will "Seek" up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will "Seek" down for the next listenable station.

The button located in the center of the left-hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset pushbutton.

CD Player

Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play.

If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.

The center button on the left side rocker switch has no function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the center button will select the next available CD in the player.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301

CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE

To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following precautions:

1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high.

NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known good disc before considering disc player service.

Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect® (if equipped).

302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CLIMATE CONTROLS

The air conditioning and heating system is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather.

Manual Heating And Air Conditioning

PUSH A/C PUSH PUSH

045607535

Manual Temperature Control

The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of outer rotary dials and inner push knobs.

BlowerControl

045607539

Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the ventilation system in any mode. The blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the "O" (OFF) position. There are seven blower speeds.

NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the "O" (Off) position.

TemperatureControl

045607540

Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures, while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures.

NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.

ModeControl(AirDirection)

045607541

Rotate this control to choose from several patterns of air distribution. You can select either a primary mode as identified by the symbols on the control, or a blend of two of these modes. The closer the setting is to a particular symbol, the more air distribution you receive from that mode.

•Panel

Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct v.

NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.

304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Bi-Level

Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.

NOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot, there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions.

• Floor

Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and window demist outlets.

•Mix

Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demist outlets. This setting works best in or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the shield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort reducing moisture on the windshield.

•Defrost

Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets. Use this mode with maximum blower and temperature settings for best wind-shield and side window defrosting.

NOTE:

- The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix, Defrost, or a blend of these modes, even if the Air Conditioning (A/C) button is not pressed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary.

- For information on operating the Rear Defrost, refer to "Rear Window Features" in "Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle".

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305

• RecirculationControl

Pressing the Recirculation Control button will put the system in recirculation mode. This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the control button to illuminate.

NOTE:

- Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.

- The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather will cause windows to fog on the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for maximum defogging.

• The A/C will engage automatically to prevent fogging when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode control is set to panel or panel/floor.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
• When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.

AirConditioningControl

045607557

Press this button to engage the Air Conditioning. A light will illuminate when the Air Conditioning system is engaged. Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures, while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures.

306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.

•MAXA/C

For maximum cooling use the A/C and recirculation buttons at the same time.

•ECONOMYMODE

If economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to turn OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then, move the temperature control to the desired temperature.

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped

The Automatic Temperature Control system automatically maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger.

AUTO PUSH 66 72 78 A/C PUSH AUTO PUSH

045640031

AutomaticTemperatureControl

AutomaticOperation

Operation of the system is quite simple.

1. Turn the Mode Control knob (on the right) and the Blower Control knob (on the left) to AUTO.

NOTE: The AUTO position performs best for front seat occupants only.

045638695

1. Dial in the temperature you would like the system to maintain by rotating the Temperature Control knob. Once the comfort level is selected, the system will maintain that level automatically using the heating system. Should the desired comfort level require air conditioning, the system will automatically make the adjustment.

You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting the "O" (OFF) position on the blower control stops the system completely and closes the outside air intake.

The recommended setting for maximum comfort for the average person is 72^ (22^) ; however, this may vary.

NOTE:

• The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime without affecting automatic operation.
• Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button to flash three times and then turn off. This indicates that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the air conditioning is not necessary.

308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

- If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.

BlowerControl

045607536

For full automatic operation or for automatic blower operation, turn the knob to the AUTO position. In manual mode there are seven blower speeds that can be individual selected. In off position the blower will shut off.

ManualOperation

This system offers a full complement of manual override features, which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic, Mode Preferred Automatic, or Blower and Mode Preferred Automatic. This means the operator can override the blower, the mode, or both. There is a manual blower range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired. The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by rotating the Blower Control knob (on the left).

NOTE: Please read the Automatic Temperature Control Operation Chart that follows for details.

Automatic Temperature Control Operation		The system will...
Operation	How	Blower Control	Mode Control	Air Temperature Control	Air Recirculation Control	A/C Operation
Full Automatic Operation	Set blower knob to Auto. Set mode knob to Auto. Set temperature knobs for comfort.	Automatic	Automatic	Automatic	Automatic but can be overridden at any time.	Automatic
Blower Preferred Automatic	Set blower knob to any desired airflow level other than Auto. Set mode knob to Auto. Set temperature knobs for comfort.	User selectable to any speed.	Automatic	Automatic	Automatic but can be overridden at any time.	Automatic
Mode Preferred Automatic	Set mode knob to any desired air delivery point other than Auto. Set blower knob to Auto. Set temperature knobs for comfort.	Automatic	User selectable to any air delivery point.	Automatic	User selectable outside or recirculated.	User selectable A/C on or off.
Blower and Mode Preferred Automatic	Set blower knob to any desired airflow level other than Auto. Set mode knob to any desired air delivery point other than Auto. Set temperature knobs for comfort.	User selectable to any speed.	User selectable to any air delivery point.	Automatic	User selectable outside or recirculated.	User selectable A/C on or off.

045669104

310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control knob (on the right) to one of the following positions.

• Panel

Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct f .

NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.

•Bi-Level

Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.

NOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot, there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions.

•Floor

Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and window demist outlets.

•Mix

Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demist outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.

•Defrost

Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets. Use this mode with maximum blower and temperature settings for best wind-shield and side window defrosting.

• AirConditionerControl

Press this button to turn on the air conditioning during manual operation only. When the air conditioning is turned on, cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets selected with the Mode control dial. Press this button a second time to turn OFF the air conditioning. An LED in the button illuminates when manual compressor operation is selected.

• RecirculationControl

The system will automatically control recirculation. However, pressing the Recirculation Control button will put the system in recirculation mode. This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the control button to illuminate.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE:

• When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
• In cold weather, use of the Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation mode is not allowed in the defrost mode in order to improve window clearing. Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these modes are selected.
• Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to fog, press the Recirculation button to return to outside air. Some temp/humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility. For this reason, the system will not allow Recirculation to be selected while in defrost mode. Attempting to use the recirculation while in these modes will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off.

312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

- Most of the time, when in Automatic Operation, you can temporarily put the system into Recirculation Mode by pressing the Recirculation button. However, under certain conditions, while in Automatic Mode, the system is blowing air out the defrost vents. When these conditions are present, and the Recirculation button is pressed, the indicator will flash and then turn off. This tells you that you are unable to go into Recirculation Mode at this time. If you would like the system to go into Recirculation Mode, you must first move the Mode knob to Panel, Bi-Level, Mix, or Floor and then press the Recirculation button. This feature reduces the possibility of window fogging.

Operating Tips

NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather conditions.

SummerOperation

The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating. A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology) coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106 and 50% water is recommended. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.

WinterOperation

Use of the air Recirculation Mode during winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging.

VacationStorage

Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower settings. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.

WindowFogging

Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes a problem, increase blower speed. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather.

NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur.

SideWindowDemisters

A side window demister outlet is located at each end of the instrument panel. These non-adjustable outlets direct air toward the side windows when the system is in the FLOOR, MIX, or DEFROST mode. The air is directed at the area of the windows through which you view the outside mirrors.

OutsideAirIntake

Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.

314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

A/CAirFilter—IfEquipped

The A/C Filter prevents most dust and pollen from entering the cabin. The filter acts on air coming from outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the passenger compartment. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for A/C Air Filter service information or see your authorized dealer for service. Refer to “Maintenance Schedules” for filter service intervals.

ControlSettingSuggestionsforVariousWeatherConditions

WEATHER	CONTROL SETTINGS
HOT WEATHER AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS VERY HOT	Open the windows, start the vehicle, press thebutton to turn recirculate off. Set the Fan control to the high position (full clockwise). Press the A/C button. Set the Mode control at or betweenand. Set the temperature control to full cool. After the hot air is pushed from the vehicle press thebutton to turn recirculate on and roll up the windows. Once you are comfortable, press thebutton to turn recirculate off and adjust the temperature control for comfort.
WARM WEATHER[4HSK]	Press thebutton to turn recirculate off.If it's sunny, set the Mode control at or nearand turn the air conditioning on. If it's cloudy or dark, set the Mode control at or near.
COOL OR COLD HI MID CONDITIONS	Press thebutton to turn recirculate off.If it's sunny, set the Mode control at or betweenandthen turn the air conditioning on. If it's cloudy or dark, set the Mode control at or nearand turn the air conditioning on. If the windows begin to fog, set Mode control at or betweenand.
[7777]	Set the Mode control at or near. If it is sunny, you may want more upper air. In this case, set the Mode control at or betweenand. In very cold weather, if you need extra heat at the windshield, set the Mode control at or near the.

045606725

STARTING AND OPERATING

CONTENTS

■STARTING PROCEDURES....321

□Manual Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . . . .321

□Automatic Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . .322

□Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

☐Extreme Cold Weather (Below -20^ F Or -29^ C)....323

□If Engine Fails To Start....323

□After Starting....323

■ ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .324

■ MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . . .324

□Five-Speed Manual Transmission....324

□Recommended Shift Speeds....326

□Downshifting....327

■AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED.....327

□Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

□ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System ....329

□Continuously Variable Automatic Transmission (CVT)....329

318 STARTING AND OPERATING

■AUTOSTICK®....335

□Operation....335

■FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

■ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS .....337

■POWER STEERING....338

□Power Steering Fluid Check....339

■PARKING BRAKE....340

□Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)....343

□Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .....346

□Traction Control System (TCS) .....346

□Brake Assist System (BAS)....347

□Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)....347

□Hill Descent Control (HDC) – If Equipped . . .348

□Hill Start Assist (HSA) – Manual Transmission Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

□Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .....352

□ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light .....355

■TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION....357

□Tire Markings....357

□ Tire Identification Number (TIN)....361

□Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . 363

□ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure .....364

STARTING AND OPERATING 319

■TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION .....368

□Tire Pressure....368

□Tire Inflation Pressures .....369

☐Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . 370

□Radial Ply Tires....371

□All Season Tires – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

□Summer Or Three Season Tires – If Equipped. .372

□Snow Tires....372

□Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

□Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped . . . . . . . . .373

□Full Size Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

□Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .374

□Tire Spinning .375

□Tread Wear Indicators....376

□Life Of Tire....376

□Replacement Tires....377

■TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) .....379

■TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS....379

■TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) .....380

□Base System....383

□ Premium System – If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

□General Information....389

■FUEL REQUIREMENTS .....390

□ 2.0L And 2.4L Engine....390

320 STARTING AND OPERATING

□Reformulated Gasoline....391
□Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends....391
□E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles .....391
□MMT In Gasoline....392
□Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
□Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
□Carbon Monoxide Warnings....394

■ADDING FUEL....394

□Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)....394
□Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

■VEHICLE LOADING....397

□Vehicle Certification Label .....397

■TRAILER TOWING....399

□Common Towing Definitions....399
□Trailer Hitch Classification .....402
□Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)....403
□Trailer And Tongue Weight....404
□Towing Requirements....405
□ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

■RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) .....413

□Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

STARTING PROCEDURES

Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.

WARNING!

• Beforeexitingavehicle,alwaysapplytheparking brake,shiftthetransmissionintoPARK,andremovethekeyfobfromtheignition.Whenleaving thevehicle,alwayslockyourvehicle.
• Neverleavechildrenaloneinavehicle,orwith accesstoanunlockedvehicle.
• Allowingchildrentobeinavehicleunattendedis dangerousforanumberofreasons.Achildor otherscouldbeseriouslyorfatallyinjured.Childrenshouldbewarnednottotouchtheparking brake,brakepedalortheshiftlever.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

- Donotleavethekeyfobinornearthevehicle, or inalocationaccessibletochildren. Achild could operate powerwindows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

Manual Transmission – If Equipped

Before starting the engine fully apply the parking brake, press the clutch pedal to the floor, and place the shift lever in NEUTRAL.

NOTE:

• The engine will not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor.
• If the key will not turn and the steering wheel is locked, rotate the wheel in either direction to relieve pressure on the locking mechanism and then turn the key.

322 STARTING AND OPERATING

Automatic Transmission – If Equipped

The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes before shifting to any driving gear.

NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting out of PARK.

TipStart

Donotpress the accelerator. Turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running. If the engine fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.

Normal Starting

Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does not require pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal. Simply turn the ignition switch to the START position and release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within 15 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the "Normal Starting" procedure.

WARNING!

Donotattempttopushortowyourvehicletogetit started. Vehiclesequippedwithanautomatictransmissioncannotbestedthisway.Unburnedfuel couldenterthecatalyticconverterandoncethe enginehasstarted,igniteanddamagetheconverter andvehicle.Ifthevehiclehasadischargedbattery, boostercablesmaybeusedtoobtainastartfrom

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

anothervehicle. This typeof start can be dangerous if done improperly, so follow the procedure carefully. Referto "Jump Starting" in "What ToDo In Emergencies" for further information.

Extreme Cold Weather (Below -20°F Or -29°C)

To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.

If Engine Fails To Start

If the engine fails to start after you have followed the "Normal Starting" and "Extreme Cold Weather" procedures, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there. Crank the engine for no more than 15 seconds. This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded. Leave the ignition key in the ON position, release the accelerator pedal and repeat the "Normal Starting" procedure.

WARNING!

Neverpourfuelorotherflammableliquidintothe throttlebodyairinletopeninginanattempttostart thevehicle. This could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury.

CAUTION!

Topreventdamagetothestarter, donotcrank the engineformorethan15secondsatatime. Wait10to 15secondsbeforetryingagain.

After Starting

The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up.

324 STARTING AND OPERATING

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED

The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.

The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.

WARNING!

Remembertodisconnecttheengineblockheater cordbeforedriving.Damagetothe110-115Volt electricalcordcouldcauseelectrocution.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED

Five-Speed Manual Transmission

WARNING!

Youorotherscouldbeinjuredifyouleavethe vehicleunattendedwithouthavingtheparking brakefullyapplied.Theparkingbrakeshouldalwaysbeappliedwhenthdriverisnotinthevehicle, especiallyonanincline.

Fully press the clutch pedal before you shift gears. As you release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator pedal.

1 3 5 2 4 R

80f7bc4b

ShiftPattern

Use each gear in numerical order, do not skip a gear. Be sure the transmission is in first gear, (not third), when starting from a standing position. Damage to the clutch can result from starting in a gear higher than first gear.

CAUTION!

• Launchinginanygearexcept1stgearwillresultin excessiveslippingoftheclutchandpotentially luggingorstallingtheengine.
• Useeachgearinnumericalorder, donotskipa gear. Besurethetransmissionisinfirstgear, (not third), when starting from a standing position. Damagetotheclutchcan result from starting in a gear higher than first gear.

For most city driving, you will find it easier to use only the lower gears. For steady highway driving with light accelerations, fifth gear is recommended.

Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, and never try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged. This will cause abnormal wear on the clutch.

326 STARTING AND OPERATING

Never shift into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to a complete stop.

NOTE: During cold weather, until the transmission lubricant is warm, you may experience slightly higher shift efforts. This is normal and not harmful to the transmission.

Recommended Shift Speeds

To use your manual transmission for optimal fuel economy, it should be upshifted as listed in the following table.

ManualTransmissionRecommendedShiftSpeeds
Unitsinmph(km/h)
Engine Size	Acceleration Rate	1 to 2	2 to 3	3 to 4	4 to 5
All Engines	Accel 14	(23)	23 (37)	29 (47)	45 (72)
	Cruise 12	(19)	18 (29)	25 (40)	32 (52)

Downshifting

Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and prolong engine life.

CAUTION!

Ifyouskipagearwhiledownshiftingordownshift attoohighofavehiclespeed,theseconditionsmay causetheenginetooverspeediftoolowofagearis selectedandtheclutchpedalisreleased.Damageto theclutchandthetransmissioncanresultfrom skippingagearwhiledownshiftingordownshifting attoohighofavehiclespeedeveniftheclutchpedal isheldpressed(i.e.,notreleased).

To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, shift down to second or first gear when descending a steep grade.

When turning a corner or driving up a steep grade, downshift early so that the engine will not be overburdened.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED

CAUTION!

Damagetothetransmissionmayoccurifthefollowingprecautionsarenotobserved:

• ShiftintoPARKonlyafterthevehiclehascometo acompletestop.
• ShiftintooroutofREVERSEonlyafterthevehicle hascometoacompletestopandtheengineisat idlespeed.
• DonotshiftbetweenPARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, orDRIVEwhentheengineisaboveidlespeed.
• Beforeshiftingintoanygear,makesureyourfoot isfirmlypressingthebrakepedal.

328 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of PARK.

WARNING!

• Unintendedmovementofvehiclecouldinjure thoseinornearthevehicle.Aswithallvehicles, youshouldneverexitavehiclewhiletheengineis running.
• Beforeexitingavehicle,alwaysapplytheparking brake,shiftthetransmissionintoPARK,andremovetheignitionkey.Oncethekeyisremoved, theshiftleverislockedinPARK,securingthe vehicleagainstunwantedmovement.Whenleavingthevehicle,alwaysremovetheignitionkeyand lockyourvehicle.
• Neverleavechildrenaloneinavehicle,orwith accesstoanunlockedvehicle.

WARNING!(Continued)

• Allowingchildrentobeinavehicleunattendedis dangerousforanumberofreasons.Achildor otherscouldbeseriouslyorfatallyinjured.Childrenshouldbewarnednottotouchtheparking brake,brakepedalortheshiftlever.
• Donotleavetheignitionkey/fobinornearthe vehicle, orinalocationaccessibletochildren. A childcouldoperatepowerwindows, othercontrols, ormovethevehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engines speed is higher than midlespeed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

(Continued)

Key Ignition Park Interlock

This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the shift lever to be in PARK before the ignition switch can be turned to the OFF position. The key fob can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the OFF position, and the shift lever is locked in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the OFF position.

NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the key fob in the ignition switch to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and stopped but the key fob cannot be removed until you obtain service.

Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System

This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake pedal must be pressed.

Continuously Variable Automatic Transmission (CVT)

The shift lever position display (located in the instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK (refer to "Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System" in this section). To drive, move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.

NOTE: The Continuously Variable Automatic Transmission (CVT) changes ratios in a continuous manner. This may sometimes "feel" as if it is slipping, but this is normal and does not harm anything.

Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.

330 STARTING AND OPERATING

Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting the transmission between these gears.

The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick® shift control (refer to "AutoStick®" in this section). Moving the shift lever to the left or right (-/+) while in the DRIVE position will manually select from a set of predefined transmission gear ratios, and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster as 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.

GearRanges

DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.

NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is especially important when the engine is cold.

Interior view of a car gear shift control panel with no visible text or symbols on the main component.

ShiftLever

PARK

This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.

When parking on a level surface, you may shift the transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking brake.

When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission into PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.

WARNING!

- NeverusethePARKpositionasasubstituteforthe parkingbrake.Alwaysapplytheparkingbrake fullywhenparkedtoguardagainstvehiclemovementandpossibleinjuryordamage.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Yourvehiclecouldmoveandinjureyouandothers ifitisnotcompletelyinPARK.Checkbytryingto movetheshiftleveroutofPARKwiththebrake pedalreleased.Makesurethetransmissionisin PARKbeforeleavingthevehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engines speed higher than midlespeed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift intake for when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintendedmovementofavehiclecouldinjure thoseinornearthevehicle.Aswithallvehicles, youshouldneverexitavehiclewhiletheengineis

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, turn the engine off, and remove the ignition key. Oncethe key is removed, the shift lever is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.

• Whenleavingthevehicle,alwaysremovetheignitionkeyandlockyourvehicle.
• Neverleavechildrenaloneinavehicle,orwith accesstoanunlockedvehicle.
• Allowingchildrentobeinavehicleunattendedis dangerousforanumberofreasons.Achildor otherscouldbeseriouslyorfatallyinjured.Childrenshouldbewarnednottotouchtheparking brake,brakepedalortheshiftlever.

WARNING!(Continued)

- Donotleavethekeyfobinornearthevehicle, or inalocationaccessibletochildren. Achild could operatepowerwindows, other controls, or move thevehicle.

CAUTION!

- BeforemovingtheshiftleveroutofPARK,you mustturntheignitionswitchfromtheOFFpositiontotheON/RUNposition,andalsopressthe brakepedal.Otherwise,damagetheshiftlever couldresult.

- DONOTracetheenginewhenshifting from PARKorNEUTRALintoanothergearrange, asthis candamagethedrivetrain.

(Continued)

The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:

• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK.

REVERSE

This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.

NEUTRAL

Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine may be started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.

WARNING!

DonotcoastinNEUTRALandneverturnoffthe ignitiontocoastdownahill.Theseareunsafe practicesthatlimityourresponsetochangingtraffic orroadconditions.Youmightlosecontrolofthe vehicleandhaveacollision.

334 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!

Towingthevehicle,coasting,ordrivingforanyother reasonwiththetransmissioninNEUTRALcancause severetransmissiondamage.Referto"Recreational Towing"in"StartingAndOperating"and"TowingA DisabledVehicle"in"WhatToDoInEmergencies" forfurtherinformation.

DRIVE

This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides the best fuel economy. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.

When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick® shift control (refer to AutoStick® in this section) to select a

lower gear ratio. Under these conditions, using a lower gear ratio will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.

During sustained high speed driving or trailer towing up long grades on hot days, the automatic transmission oil may become too hot. If this happens, the transmission overheat indicator light will come on, and the vehicle will slow slightly until the transmission cools down enough to allow a return to the requested speed. This is done to prevent transmission damage due to overheating. If the high speed is maintained, the overheating may reoccur, as before, in a cyclic fashion.

LOW-IFEQUIPPED

This range should be used for engine braking when descending very steep grades. In this range, the transmission will downshift for maximum engine braking, and upshifts will occur only to prevent engine overspeed.

AUTOSTICK®

AutoStick® is a driver-interactive transmission feature providing six manually selectable gear ratios, giving you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick® allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. This system can also provide you with more control during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer towing, and many other situations.

Operation

NOTE: AutoStick® is not available until the CVT warms up in cold weather.

When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position, AutoStick® is activated by moving the shift lever side-to-side. Moving the shift lever to the right (+) will activate AutoStick® and shift up to the next higher manual ratio, unless you are already operating in or near Overdrive, in which case sixth gear ratio will be selected. In like manner, moving the shift lever to the left (-) will activate AutoStick® and shift to the next lower manual ratio. The manually-selected gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster.

In AutoStick® mode, the transmission will shift up or down when the driver moves the shift lever to the right (+) or left (-), unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would result. It will remain in the selected gear until another upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described below:

• The transmission will automatically downshift to first gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated.
• The transmission will automatically upshift when necessary to prevent engine over-speed.
• If a downshift would cause the engine to overspeed, that shift will not occur until it is safe for the engine.

336 STARTING AND OPERATING

• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when AutoStick® is engaged.
• Heavy Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) application will disengage AutoStick® mode.
• If the system detects powertrain overheating, the transmission will revert to the automatic shift mode and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off.
• If the system detects a problem, it will disable AutoStick® mode and the transmission will return to automatic mode until the problem is corrected.
• To disengage AutoStick® mode, hold the shift lever to the right (+) until "D" is once again displayed in the instrument cluster. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick® mode at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.

WARNING!

Donotdownshiftforadditionalenginebrakingona slipperysurface. Thedrivewheelscouldlosetheir gripandthevehiclecouldskid,causingacollisionor personalinjury.

STARTING AND OPERATING 337

This feature provides full time, on-demand, four-wheel drive (4WD).

Interior view of a car showing a car intake section with a black arrow pointing to the intake area (no text or symbols visible)

Four-WheelDriveSwitch

Where one or more wheels have wheel spin or if additional traction is needed in sand, deep snow, or loose traction surfaces, activate the "4WD LOCK" switch by pulling up once and releasing. This locks the center coupling allowing more torque to be sent to the rear wheels. The "4WD Indicator Light" will come on in the cluster. This can be done on the fly, at any vehicle speed. To deactivate, simply pull on the switch one more time. The "4WD Indicator Light" will then go out.

NOTE: Refer to "Electronic Brake Control System/Electronic Stability Control (ESC)" in "Starting and Operating" for further information.

ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS

Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars.

338 STARTING AND OPERATING

An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems. They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover.

POWER STEERING

The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost. If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers.

NOTE:

• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This noise should be considered normal, and it does not in any way damage the steering system.

WARNING!

Continuedoperationwithreducedpowersteering assistcouldposeasafetyrisktoyourselfandothers. Serviceshouldbeobtainedassoonaspossible.

CAUTION!

Prolongedoperationofthesteeringsystemattheend ofthesteeringwheeltravelwillincreasethesteering fluidtemperatureanditshouldbeavoidedwhen possible.Damagetothepowersteeringpumpmay occur.

Power Steering Fluid Check

Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required. The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are

apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.

CAUTION!

Donotusechemicalflushesinyourpowersteering systemasthechemicalscandamageyourpower steeringcomponents.Suchdamageisnotcoveredby theNewVehicleLimitedWarranty.

WARNING!

Fluidlevelshouldbecheckedonalevelsurfaceand withtheengineofftopreventinjuryfrommoving partsandtoensureaccuratefluidlevelreading.Do notoverfill.Useonlymanufacturer'srecommended powersteeringfluid.

340 STARTING AND OPERATING

If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.

PARKING BRAKE

Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave an automatic transmission in PARK, or manual transmission in REVERSE or first gear.

The parking brake lever is located in the center console. To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever completely.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a car seatbelt with an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols present)

ParkingBrake

When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position, the "Brake Warning Light" in the instrument cluster will illuminate.

NOTE:

• When the parking brake is applied and the automatic transmission is placed in gear, the "Brake Warning Light" will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.

WARNING!

• Whenleavingthevehicle,alwaysremovethekey fobfromtheignitionandlockyourvehicle.
• Neverleavechildrenaloneinavehicle,orwith accesstoanunlockedvehicle.
• Allowingchildrentobeinvehicleunattendedis dangerousforanumberofreasons.Achildor otherscouldbeseriouslyorfatallyinjured.Childrenshouldbewarnednottotouchtheparking brake,brakepedalortheshiftlever.
• Donotleavethekeyfobinornearthevehicle, or inalocationaccessibletochildren. Achildcould operatepowerwindows, othercontrols, ormove thevehicle.
• Besuretheparkingbrakeisfullydisengaged beforedriving;failuretodosocanleadtobrake failureandacollision.

(Continued)

342 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!(Continued)

- Alwaysfullyapplytheparkingbrakewhenleavingyourvehicleoritmayrollandcausedamageor injury. Also, becertaintoleaveanautomatictransmissioninPARK, amanualtransmissioninREVERSEorfirstgear. Failuretodosomaycausethe vehicletorollandcausedamageorinjury.

CAUTION!

If the Brake System Warning Lightremainson with the parkingbrakereleased, abrakesystemmalfunctionisindicated. Havethebrakesystemserviced by anauthorizeddealerimmediately.

BRAKE SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with power assisted brakes as standard equipment. In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for example, repeated brake applications with the engine off), the brakes will still function. However, the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system operating.

WARNING!

Ridingthebrakescanleadtobrakefailureand possiblyacollision.Drivingwithyourfootrestingor ridingonthebrakepedalcanresultinabnormally highbraketemperatures,excessiveliningwear,and possiblebrakedamage.Youwouldnothaveyourfull brakingcapacityinanemergency.

If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal capability, the remaining system will still function with some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be evident by increased pedal travel during application and greater pedal force required to slow or stop. In addition, if the malfunction is caused by an internal leak, as the brake fluid in the master cylinder drops, the “Brake Warning Light” will light.

WARNING!

Drivingvehiclewiththe"BrakeWarningLight"onis dangerous.Asignificantdecreaseinbrakingperformanceorvehiclestabilityduringbrakingmayoccur.It willtakeyoulongertostopthevehicleorwillmake yourvehiclehardertocontrol.Youcouldhavea collision.Havethevehiclecheckedimmediately.

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)

The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions. The system automatically “pumps” the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent wheel lock-up.

WARNING!

• Pumpingoftheanti-lockbrakeswilldiminish theireffectivenessandmayleadtoacollision. Pumpingmakethestoppingdistancelonger.Just pressfirmlyonyourbrakepedalwhenyouneedto slowdownorstop.
• The ABScannotpreventthenaturallawsofphysicsfromactingonthevehicle,norcanitincrease brakingorsteeringefficiencybeyondthatafforded bytheconditionofthevehiclebrakesandtiresor thetractionafforded.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• The ABScannotpreventcollisions, including those resulting from excessivespeedinturns, following another vehicle to closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in areckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

The “ABS Warning Light” monitors the ABS System. The light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.

If the “ABS Warning Light” remains on or comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is

required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the "Brake Warning Light" is not on.

If the “ABS Warning Light” is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “ABS Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the bulb repaired as soon as possible.

If both the “Brake Warning Light” and the “ABS Warning Light” remain on, the ABS and Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) systems are not functioning. Immediate repair to the ABS is required.

When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises. These noises are the system performing its self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS

working properly. This self-check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).

ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can include ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic stops.

You may also experience the following when the brake system goes into anti-lock mode:

• the ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a short time after the stop)
  • the clicking sound of solenoid valves
• brake pedal pulsations
• a slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop

These are all normal characteristics of ABS.

WARNING!

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) contains sophisticated electronicequipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radiotransmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of Anti-Lock braking capability. Installation of such equipments should be performed by qualified professionals.

All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer.

346 STARTING AND OPERATING

Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional advanced electronic brake control system that includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM), Hill Descent Control (HDC), Hill Start Assist (HSA), and Electronic Stability Control (ESC). All systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions and are commonly referred to as ESC.

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)

This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions. The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking. Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.

Traction Control System (TCS)

This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in either the “Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes. Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this section of this manual.

Brake Assist System (BAS)

The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle's braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence (do not "pump" the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.

WARNING!

• The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the naturallawsof physics from acting on the vehicle, nor canitin increasethetraction afforded by prevailing road conditions.
• The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed inturns, driving on very slipper surface, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in areckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)

This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver's steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicles speed

348 STARTING AND OPERATING

are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it applies the brake of the appropriate wheel and may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneuvers.

ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It can not prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions, leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles.

NOTE: Anytime the ESC system is in the "Full Off" mode, ERM is disabled. Refer to "Electronic Stability Control (ESC)" in this section for a complete explanation of the available ESC modes.

WARNING!

Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions and driving conditions, influence the chance that wheel liftor rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel liftor rollovers, especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in arecklessordangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

Hill Descent Control (HDC) – If Equipped

This system maintains vehicle speed while descending hills during off-road driving situations. HDC will automatically apply the brakes to control downhill speed to between 4 mph (7 km/h) and 6 mph (9 km/h) depending on terrain. The system is activated by placing the vehicle in "Off-Road" mode and placing the shift lever in LOW

or REVERSE. Refer to "Safe Off-Road Driving" in "Starting and Operating" for further information.

When HDC is properly enabled, the "Hill Decent Control Light" in the instrument cluster will be illuminated.

HDC has the capability to sense terrain and will only activate when the vehicle is descending a hill. It will not activate on level ground. If desired, HDC can be fully deactivated by putting the vehicle into ESC "Full Off" mode. This is done by pressing and holding the "ESC Off" button for five seconds. Refer to "Electronic Stability Control (ESC)" in this section of the manual.

HDC operation can be overridden with brake application to slow the vehicle down below the HDC control speed. Conversely, if more speed is desired during HDC control, the accelerator pedal will increase vehicle speed like

normal. When either the brake or the accelerator is released, HDC will control the vehicle back to the original set speed.

HDC is only intended for low speed off-road driving. At vehicle speeds above 31 mph (50 km/h) HDC will no longer function. If the "HDC Indicator Light" begins to flash this indicates that the brakes are getting too hot and the vehicle should be stopped to allow the brakes to cool.

WARNING!

HDCisonlyintendedtoassistthedriverincontrollingvehiclespeedwhendescendinghills. Thedriver mustremainattentivetothedrivingconditionsand isresponsibleformaintainingasafevehiclespeed.

350 STARTING AND OPERATING

Hill Start Assist (HSA) – Manual Transmission Only

The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time, the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The system will release brake pressure in proportion to amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel.

HSAActivationCriteria

The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate:

• Vehicle must be stopped.
• Vehicle must be on a 7% grade or greater hill.

- Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).

WARNING!

Theremaybesituationsonminorhills(i.e.,lessthan 8%),withaloadedvehicle,orwhilepullingatrailer, whenthesystemwillnotactivateandslightrolling mayoccur.Thiscouldcauseacollisionwithanother vehicleorobject.Alwaysrememberthedriveris responsibleforbrakingthevehicle.

Disabling/EnablingHSA

If you wish to turn on or off the HSA system, it can be done using the Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information.

For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the following steps:

NOTE: You must complete Steps 1 through 8 within 90 seconds.

1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. Apply the parking brake.

4. Start the engine.

5. Release the clutch pedal (if equipped).

6. Rotate the steering wheel one-half turn to the left.
7. Press the "ESC Off" switch (located in the lower switch bank below the climate controls) four times within 20 seconds. The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" should turn on and turn off two times.
8. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an additional half-turn to the right.
9. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then back to the ON position. If the sequence was completed properly, the "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" will blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled.
10. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to it's previous setting.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for over-steering or under-steering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the over-steering or under-steering condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path. ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the over-steer or under-steer condition

• Over-steer - when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
- Under-steer - when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position.

WARNING!

• The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent then natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the extraction afforded by prevailing road conditions.
• ESCcannotpreventaccidents,includingthoseresultingfromexcessivespeedinturns,drivingon veryslippery surfaces,orhydroplaning.ESCalso cannotpreventcollisionsresultingfromlossof vehiclecontrolduetoinappropriatedriverinput fortheconditions.Onlyasafe,attentive,and skillfuldrivercanpreventcollisions.
• The capabilities of an ESC-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in areckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

ESCOperatingModes

The ESC system has three available operating modes for four-wheel drive equipped vehicles and two available operating modes for two-wheel drive equipped vehicles.

FullOn(Four-WheelDriveModels)OrOn(Two-WheelDriveModels)

This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started the ESC system will be in this “On” mode. This mode should be used for most driving situations. ESC should only be turned to “Partial Off” or “ESC Off” for specific reasons as noted below.

PartialOff(Four-WheelDriveModels)OrOn(Two-WheelDriveModels)

This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the "ESC Off" switch. When in "Partial Off" mode, the TCS portion of ESC, except for the "limited slip" feature described in the TCS section, has been disabled and the "ESC

Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" will be illuminated. All other stability features of ESC function normally. This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain traction.

To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the "ESC Off" switch. This will restore the normal "ESC On" mode of operation.

NOTE: To improve the vehicle's traction when driving with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the "Partial Off" mode by pressing the "ESC Off" switch. Once the situation requiring ESC to be switched to the "Partial Off" mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily pressing the "ESC Off" switch. This may be done while the vehicle is in motion.

354 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

Whenin"PartialOff" mode, the TCS functionality of ESC(exceptforthelimitedslipfeature described in the TCSsection) has been disabled and the "ESCOff IndicatorLight" will be illuminated. Whenin "PartialOff" mode, the engine power reduction of TCS is disabled, and then enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ECS system is reduced.

FullOff(Four-WheelDriveModelsOnly)

This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use when ESC stability features could inhibit vehicle maneuverability due to trail conditions. This mode is entered by pressing and holding the "ESC Off" switch for five seconds when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is running. After five seconds, the "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" will illuminate and the

"ESC OFF" message will appear in the odometer. Press and release the Trip Odometer button located on the instrument cluster to clear this message.

In this mode, ESC and TCS, except for the “limited slip” feature described in the TCS section, are turned off until the vehicle reaches a speed of 35 mph (56 km/h). At 35 mph (56 km/h) the system returns to “Partial Off” mode, as described above. TCS remains off. When the vehicle speed drops below 30 mph (48 km/h) the ESC system shuts off. ESC is deactivated at low vehicle speeds so that it will not interfere with off-road driving however, ESC function returns to provide the stability feature at speeds above 35 mph (56 km/h). The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will always be illuminated when ESC is off.

To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the "ESC Off" switch. This will restore the "ESC On" mode of operation.

NOTE: The “ESC OFF” message will display and an audible chime will sound when the shift lever is placed into the PARK position from any other position, and then moved out of the PARK position. This will occur even if the message was previously cleared.

WARNING!

WiththeESCinthe"FullOff"mode,theengine torquereductionandstabilityfeaturesaredisabled. Therefore,theenhancedvehiclestabilityofferedby ESPisunavailable.Inanemergencyevasivemaneuver,theESCsystemwillnotengagetoassistin maintainingstability."ESCOff"modeisintended foroff-highwayoroff-roaduseonly.

ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light

The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also

356 STARTING AND OPERATING

flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.

NOTE:

• The "ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light" and the "ESC OFF Indicator Light" come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
  • Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously.

- The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation.

The "ESC OFF Indicator Light" indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.

STARTING AND OPERATING 357

TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION

Tire Markings

NOTE:

graph TD
    A["1"] --> B["TIRE NAME"]
    B --> C["P215/65R15 95H"]
    C --> D["MANUFACTURER"]
    D --> E["LOAD & SHEET COORD MAX."]
    E --> F["TRAVOLAR 220 TRACTION TEMPERATING"]
    F --> G["3"]
    F --> H["4"]
    F --> I["5"]
    F --> J["6"]

054903773

1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards

Code (TIN)

2 — Size Designation

3 — Service Description

4 — Maximum Load

5 — Maximum Pressure

6 — Treadwear, Traction and

Temperature Grades

- P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter "P" molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.

- European-Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.

- LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters "LT" that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.

358 STARTING AND OPERATING

• Temporary spare tires are spares designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare tires have the letter "T" or "S" molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

TireSizingChart

EXAMPLE:

SizeDesignation:

P= Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards"....blank....." = Passenger car tire based on European design standardsLT= Light truck tire based on U.S. design standardsT o r S = Temporary spare tire31= Overall diameter in inches (in)

215= Section width in millimeters (mm)

65= Aspect ratio in percent (%)— Ratio of section height to section width of tire10.5= Section width in inches (in)

R= Construction code— "R"means radial construction— "D"means diagonal or bias construction

15= Rim diameter in inches (in)

360 STARTING AND OPERATING

EXAMPLE:

ServiceDescription:

95= Load Index— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry

H= Speed Symbol— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)

LoadIdentification:

"....blank..." = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire

ExtraLoad(XL)= Extra load (or reinforced) tire

LightLoad(LL)= Light load tire

C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure

MaximumLoad— Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry

MaximumPressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.

Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.

362 STARTING AND OPERATING

EXAMPLE:

DOTMAL9ABCD0301

DOT= Department of Transportation— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use

MA= Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)

L9= Code representing the tire size (two digits)

ABCD= Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)

03= Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)— 03 means the 3rd week.

01= Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)— 01 means the year 2001— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

Tire Terminology And Definitions

TermDefinition
B-PillarThe vehicle B-Pillar	is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
ColdTireInflationPressureCold tire inflation	inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
MaximumInflationPressureThe maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
RecommendedColdTire InflationPressure	Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
TirePlacardA paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle's loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

364 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Loading And Tire Pressure

TireAndLoadingInformationPlacardLocation

NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side door.

Interior view of a car showing the door, seat, and window (no text or symbols visible)

TirePlacardLocation

TireAndLoadingInformationPlacard

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION SEATING CAPACITY - TOTAL 5 FRONT 2 REAR 3 THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX KG OR XXX LES TIRE FRONT REAR SPARE ORIGINAL TIRE SIZE P195/70R14 P195/70R14 T125/70D15 COLD TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE 200kPa, 29PSI 200kPa, 29PSI 420kPa, 60PSI SEE OWNER'S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 4N109288

811b5a9a

TireandLoadingInformationPlacard

This placard tells you important information about the:

1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare tires.

Loading

The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the "Vehicle Loading" section of this manual.

NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to "Vehicle Loading" in this section.

To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle, locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg" on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here.

StepsForDeterminingCorrectLoadLimit

1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg" on your vehicle's placard.

366 STARTING AND OPERATING

1. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
2. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
3. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if "XXX" amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 - 750 = 650 lbs [295 kg]).

4. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

5. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

NOTE:

- The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.

- For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).

Occupants TOTAL FRONT REAR Combined weight of occupants and cargo from Tire Placard MINUS Combined Occupant's weight = AVAILABLE Cargo/Luggage and Trailer Tongue Weight EXAMPLE 1 5 2 3 865 lbs minus 670 lbs = 195 lbs EXAMPLE 2 3 2 1 865 lbs minus 540 lbs = 325 lbs EXAMPLE 3 2 2 0 865 lbs minus 400 lbs = 465 lbs Occupant 1: 200 lbs Occupant 2: 190 lbs Occupant 3: 180 lbs Occupant 4: 160 lbs Occupant 5: 140 lbs TOTAL WEIGHT: 670 lbs E X A M P E

B11add11

WARNING!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause it re failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Usetires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.

TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION

Tire Pressure

Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure:

Safety

WARNING!

• Improperlyinflatedtiresaredangerousandcan causecollisions.
• Under-inflationincreasestireflexingandcanresultinover-heatingandtirefailure.
  • Over-inflationreducesatire'sabilitytocushion shock.Objectsontheroadandchuckholescan causedamagethatresultintirefailure.
  • Over-inflatedorunder-inflatedtirescanaffective-vehiclehandlingandcanfailsuddenly, resulting in lossofvehiclecontrol.
• Unequaltirepressurescancausesteeringproblems.Youcouldlosecontrolofyourvehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Unequaltirepressuresfromonesideofthevehicle totheothercancausethevehicletodrifttothe rightorleft.
• Alwaysdrivewitheachtireinflatedtotherecommendedcoldtireinflationpressure.

Economy

Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.

RideComfortAndVehicleStability

Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the

stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.

Unequal tire pressures can cause erratic and unpredictable steering response.

Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right.

Tire Inflation Pressures

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's side "B" Pillar or rear edge of the driver's side door.

The tire pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.

CAUTION!

Afterinspectingoradjustingthetirepressure,alwaysreinstallthevalvestemcap.Thiswillprevent moistureanddirtfromenteringthevalvestem, whichcoulddamagethevalvestem.

Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always “cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.

Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with temperature changes.

Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12^ F ( 7^ C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the winter.

Example: If garage temperature = 68^ F ( 20^ C) and the outside temperature = 32^ F ( 0^ C) then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12^ F ( 7^ C) for this outside temperature condition.

Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low.

Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation

The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle

loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

WARNING!

Highspeeddrivingwithyourvehicleundermaximumloadisdangerous.Theaddedstrainonyour tirescouldcausethemtofail.Youcouldhavea seriouscollision.Donotdrivevehicleloadedtothe maximumcapacityatcontinuousspeedsabove 75mph(120km/h).

Radial Ply Tires

WARNING!

Combiningradialplytireswithothertypesoftires onyourvehiclewillcauseyourvehicletohandle poorly.Theinstabilitycouldcauseacollision.Alwaysuseradialplytiresinsetsoffour.Never combinethemwithothertypesoftires.

Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.

All Season Tires – If Equipped

All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring, summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on

372 STARTING AND OPERATING

the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

Summer Or Three Season Tires – If Equipped

Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice. Summer tires will not contain the all season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

Snow Tires

Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.

If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before using these tire types.

Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel – If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and function to the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern.

If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equipment tire and wheel as a spare, a non-matching temporary emergency use spare may be equipped with your vehicle. Temporary use spares are engineered to be used only with your vehicle. Your vehicle may be equipped with one of the following types of non-matching temporary use spares; compact, full size, or limited-use. Do not install more than one non-matching temporary use spare tire/wheel on the vehicle at any given time.

CAUTION!

Because of the reduced ground clearance, donottake your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact, full size or limited -usetemporary spare installed. Damageto the vehicle may result.

Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped

The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver's side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter "T" or "S" preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.

T, S = Temporary Spare Tire

374 STARTING AND OPERATING

Since this tire has limited tread life the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.

Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time.

WARNING!

Compactsparesarefortemporaryemergencyuse only.Withthesespares,donotdrivemorethan 50mph(80km/h).Temporaryusespareshavelimited treadlife.Whenthetreadisworntothetreadwear indicators,thetemporaryusesparetireneedstobe replaced.Besuretofollowthewarnings,which applytoyourspare.Failureretodosocouldresultin sparetirefailureandlossofvehiclecontrol.

Full Size Spare – If Equipped

The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.

Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped

The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as

your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.

WARNING!

Limited-usesparesareforemergencyuseonly.Installationofthislimited-usesparetireaffectsvehicle handling.Withthistire,donotdrivemorethanthe speedlistedonthelimit-usesparewheel.Keep inflatedtothecoldtireinflationpressurelistedon yourTireandLoadingInformationPlacardlocated onthedriver'ssidedooropening.Replace(orrepair) theoriginalequipmenttireatthefirstopportunity andreinstallitonyourvehicle.Failureretodosocould resultinlossofvehiclecontrol.

Tire Spinning

When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck.

Refer to "Freeing A Stuck Vehicle" in "What To Do In Emergencies" for further information.

WARNING!

Fastspinningtirescanbedangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheels speeds may cause tired damage or failure. Atire could explode and injuresome one. Donot spiny our vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) form more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and donot let any on near aspinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

376 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tread Wear Indicators

Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced.

Two views of a car tire showing tread pattern and texture (no text or symbols)

055007576

1—WornTire

2—New Tire

These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.

Life Of Tire

The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including, but not limited to:

• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or higher, and summer tires, typically have a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance schedule is highly recommended.

WARNING!

Tiresandthesparetireshouldbereplacedaftersix years,regardlessoftheremainingtread.Failureto followthiswarningcanresultinsuddentirefailure. Youcouldlosecontrolandhaveacollisionresulting inseriousinjuryordeath.

Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.

Replacement Tires

The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on "Tread Wear Indicators"). Refer to the "Tire and Loading

Information" placard for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.

It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle's handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel's specifications match those of the original wheels.

It is recommended you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.

WARNING!

• Donotuseatire, wheelsizeorratingotherthan thatspecifiedforyourvehicle. Some combinations of unapprovedtiresandwheelsmaychangesuspensiondimensionsandperformancecharacteristics, resultinginchangestosteering, handling, and brakingofyourvehicle. This can cause unpredictablehandlingandstresstosteeringandsuspensioncomponents. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheelsizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Neveruseatirewithasmallerloadindexor capacity,otherthanwhatwasoriginallyequipped onyourvehicle.Usingatirewithasmallerload indexcouldresultintireoverloadingandfailure. Youcouldlosecontrolandhaveacollision.

WARNING!(Continued)

- Failuretoequipyourvehiclewithtireshaving adequatespeedcapabilitycanresultinsuddentire failureandlossofvehiclecontrol.

CAUTION!

Replacingoriginaltireswithtiresofadifferentensize mayresultinfalsespeedometerandodometerreadings.

TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)

Due to limited clearance, tire chains or traction devices are not recommended.

CAUTION!

Damagetothevehiclemayresultiftirechainsare used.

TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS

The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at different loads and perform different steering, driving, and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.

STARTING AND OPERATING 379

These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.

380 STARTING AND OPERATING

The suggested rotation method is the "rearward cross" shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern does not apply to some directional tires that must not be reversed.

graph TD
    A["Top Unit"] --> B["Left Unit"]
    A --> C["Right Unit"]
    D["Vehicle Icon"] --> A
    D --> C
    E["Bottom Unit"] --> F["Left Unit"]
    E --> G["Right Unit"]

TireRotation

055707139

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.

The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on "cold inflation tire pressure". This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to "Tires – General Information" in "Starting and Operating" for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle's tires. The tire pressure will

also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.

The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for any reason, including low temperature effects, or natural pressure loss through the tire.

The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off. The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be

driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be ON. In this situation, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle's recommended cold placard pressure value.

CAUTION!

• TheTPMShasbeenoptimizedfortheoriginal equipmenttiresandwheels.TPMSpressuresand warningshavebeenestablishedforthetiresize equippedonyourvehicle.Undesirablesystemoperationorsensordamagemayresultwhenusing replacementequipmentthatisnotofthesamesize, type,and/orstyle.Aftermarketwheelscancause sensordamage.Donotuseaftermarkettiresealants orbalancebeadsifyourvehicleisequippedwitha TPMS,asdamagetothesensorsmayresult.
• Afterinspectingoradjustingthe tirepressure, alwaysreinstallthevalvestemcap. Thiswill preventmoistureanddirtfromenteringthevalve stem,whichcoulddamagetheTirePressureMonitoringSensor.

NOTE:

• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.

- Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire.

Base System

This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the instrument cluster.

The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module.

NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly and to maintain the proper pressure.

The TPMS consists of the following components:

• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
  •Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

TirePressureMonitoringLowPressureWarnings

The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster, a LOW TIRE message will be displayed for a minimum of five seconds, and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low. Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle's recommended cold placard pressure value. The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish and the LOW

384 STARTING AND OPERATING

TIRE message will turn off once the updated tire pressures have been received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.

CheckTPMSWarnings

The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound a chime. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists. The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur with any of the following scenarios:

1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors.

2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals.

3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.

NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare wheel and tire assembly.

1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire.

2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light and LOW TIRE message will still turn ON due to the low tire.

3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.

4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare tire, the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

Premium System – If Equipped

The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module.

NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure.

The TPMS consists of the following components:

• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Three Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four wheel wells)

386 STARTING AND OPERATING

• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages, which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
  • Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

TirePressureMonitoringLowPressureWarnings

The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low. The audible chime will sound once every ignition cycle for the first condition that it detects. In addition, the EVIC will display a "LOW TIRE" text message for a minimum of five seconds and a graphic of the pressure value(s) with the low tire(s) flashing.

LOW TIRE : 200:5 : 300:5

81826bed

Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible and inflate all tires that are flashing on the graphic display to the vehicle's recommended cold placard pressure value. The system will automatically update, the "LOW TIRE" text message will no longer be displayed, the graphic display of the pressure value(s) will stop flashing, and the Tire

Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressure(s) have been received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.

ServiceTPMSMessage

The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound a chime. The EVIC will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five seconds. This text message is then followed by a graphic display, with "-" in place of the pressure value(s) indicating which Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received.

Pixelated text image showing fragmented characters and symbols, possibly from a document or form.

81826bd7

388 STARTING AND OPERATING

If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash, the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" text message will not be present, and a pressure value will be displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can occur with any of the following scenarios:

1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals.
3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.

The EVIC will also display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five seconds when a system fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is detected. In this case, the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message is then followed with a graphic display with pressure values still shown. This indicates that the pressure values are still being received from the TPM sensors but they may not be located in the correct vehicle position. The system still needs to be serviced as long as the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message is displayed.

NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare wheel and tire assembly.

1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will

sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still turn ON due to the low tire. The "LOW TIRE" text message and the graphic with the low tire pressure flashing will be displayed.

1. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition, the EVIC will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure values.

2. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure values.

3. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare tire, the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

General Information

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:

• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

390 STARTING AND OPERATING

The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses:

United States KR5S18002015B
Canada 267T-S180015B

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

2.0L And 2.4L Engine

This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded “regular” gasoline having an octane rating of 87. The use

of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines.

Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.

Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance, and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available.

Reformulated Gasoline

Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.” Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.

The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components.

Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends

Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates may be used in your vehicle.

CAUTION!

DONOTusegasolinecontainingMethanolorgasolinecontainingmorethan10%Ethanol.Useofthese blendsmayresultinstartinganddriveabilityproblems,damagecriticalfuelsystemcomponents,cause emissionstoexceedtheapplicablestandard,and/or causethe"MalfunctionIndicatorLight"toilluminate.Pumplabelsshouldclearlycommunicateifa fuelcontainsgreaterthan10%Ethanol.

Problems that result from using gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may not be covered under warranty.

E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles

Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle's warranty.

392 STARTING AND OPERATING

If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:

• operate in a lean mode
- OBD II "Malfunction Indicator Light" on
• poor engine performance
• poor cold start and cold drivability
- increased risk for fuel system component corrosion

To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E-85 perform the following:

• drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
• change the engine oil and oil filter
• disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory

More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E-85 fuel.

MMT In Gasoline

MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump, therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline.

Materials Added To Fuel

All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal

conditions and they would result in additional cost. Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.

Fuel System Cautions

CAUTION!

Followtheseguidelinestomaintainyourvehicle's performance:

• TheuseofleadedgasisprohibitedbyFederallaw. Usingleadedgasolinecanimpairengineperformanceanddamagetheemissionscontrolsystem.
• Anout-of-tuneengineorcertainfuelorignition malfunctionscancausethecatalyticconverterto overheat.Ifyounoticeapungentburningodoror somelightsmoke,yourenginemaybeoutoftuneor malfunctioningandmayrequireimmediateservice. Contactyourauthorizeddealerforserviceassistance.

CAUTION!(Continued)

- The useoffueladditives, which are now being sold as octaneenhancers, is not recommended. Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuelsystem damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuel soradditives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

394 STARTING AND OPERATING

Carbon Monoxide Warnings

WARNING!

Carbonmonoxide(CO)inexhaustgasesisdeadly. Followtheprecautionsbelowtopreventcarbon monoxidepoisoning:

• Donotinhaleexhaustgases. They contain carbon monoxide, acolorless and odorless gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as agarage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engineer running for an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running form more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guardagainstcarbonmonoxidewithpropermaintenance.Havetheexhaustsysteminspectedevery

WARNING!(Continued)

timethevehicleisraised.Haveanyabnormal conditionsrepairedpromptly.Untilrepaired,drive withallsidewindowsfullyopen.

ADDING FUEL

Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)

The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door, on the left side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.

After removing the gas cap, place the gas cap tether cable over a hook on the inside of the fuel door. This keeps the gas cap suspended away from and protects the vehicle's surface.

(Continued)

Medical illustration of a mechanical device with a black arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols present)

FuelFillerCap

CAUTION!

• Damagetothefuelsystemoremissioncontrol systemcouldresultfromusinganimproperfuel tankfillercap(gascap).Apoorlyfittingcapcould letimpuritiesintothefuelsystem.
• Apoorlyfittinggascapmaycausethe"MalfunctionIndicatorLight(MIL)"toturnon.
• Toavoidfuelspillageandoverfilling, donot"top off"thefueltankafterfilling.

WARNING!

- Neverhaveanysmokingmaterialslitinornearthe vehiclewhenthegascapisremovedorthetankis beingfilled.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Neveraddfuelwhentheengineisrunning. This is inviolationofmoststateandfederalfireregulationsandmaycausetheMILtoturnon.
• Afiremayresultifgasolineispumpedintoa portablecontainerthatisinsideofavehicle.You couldbeburned.Alwaysplacegascontainerson thegroundwhilefilling.

NOTE:

• When the fuel nozzle "clicks" or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
• Tighten the gas cap about 1/4 turn until you hear one click. This is an indication that cap is properly tightened.

- If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL will come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message

If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose or improperly installed, a "gASCAP" message will be displayed in the Odometer/Trip Odometer in the instrument cluster. Refer to "Instrument Cluster Description" in "Understanding Your Instrument Panel" for further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer/trip odometer RESET button to turn the message off. If the problem continues, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. Refer to "Onboard Diagnostic System" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.

VEHICLE LOADING

As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver's side door or B-Pillar.

Vehicle Certification Label

Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label attached to the driver's door B-Pillar.

The label contains the following information:

• Name of manufacturer
•Month and year of manufacture
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
- Type of Vehicle
•Month, Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)

The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).

GrossVehicleWeightRating(GVWR)

The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.

TireSize

The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.

RimSize

This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed.

InflationPressure

This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR.

CurbWeight

The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added.

Overloading

The load carrying components (springs, tires, wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR.

The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it is not over the GVWR.

Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life. Heavier suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle's GVWR.

Loading

To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty weight. Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before driving. Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles, and the way the brakes operate.

CAUTION!

Donotloadyourvehicleanyheavierthanthe GVWR.Ifyoudo,partsonyourvehiclecanbreak,or itcanchangethewayyourvehiclehandles.This couldcauseyoutolosecontrol.Also,overloadingcan shortenthelifeofyourvehicle.

TRAILER TOWING

In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible.

To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.

Common Towing Definitions

The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information:

GrossVehicleWeightRating(GVWR)

The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.

GrossTrailerWeight(GTW)

The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and ready for operation" condition. The recommended way to

400 STARTING AND OPERATING

measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale.

GrossCombinationWeightRating(GCWR)

The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.

NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg) allowance for the presence of a driver.

GrossAxleWeightRating(GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.

WARNING!

It is important that you donot exceed them maximum frontorrear GAWR. Adangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision.

TongueWeight(TW)

The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be more than 10% of the trailer load. You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.

FrontalArea

The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer.

TrailerSwayControl

The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.

Weight-CarryingHitch

A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized trailers.

Weight-DistributingHitch

A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with the manufacturer's directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction / hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration / loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.

WARNING!

- An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch systemmayreducehandling, stability, braking performance, and could result in a collision.

(Continued)

402 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!(Continued)

• WeightDistributingSystemsmaynotbecompatible withSurgeBrakeCouplers.Consultwithyourhitch andtrailermanufacturerorareputableRecreational Vehicledealerforadditionalinformation.

Trailer Hitch Classification

The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.

TrailerHitchClassificationDefinitions
ClassMax.TrailerHitchIndustryStandards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty	10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.

Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)

The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.

Engine/TransmissionFrontalArea	MaximumGTW(Gross TrailerWt.)	MaximumTongueWt. (SeeNote)
2.0L Auto/Man 22 sq ft (2.04 sq m) 1,000 lbs (450 kg) 150 lbs (50 kg)
2.4L Auto/Man 22 sq ft (2.04 sq m) 1,000 lbs (450 kg) 150 lbs (50 kg)
2.4L Auto/Man with Trailer Tow Prep Package (AHC)	32 sq ft (3.0 sq m) 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 300 lbs (136 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.

NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to "Tire Safety Information" in "Starting and Operating" for further information.

Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severelyside to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer collisions.

Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.

60% 40% 057003767

Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:

• The tongue weight of the trailer.
- The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.

NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to the "Tire and Loading Information" placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle.

Towing Requirements

To promote proper break-in of your vehicle drivetrain components, the following guidelines are recommended:

CAUTION!

• Donottowatraileratallduringthefirst500miles (805km)thenewvehicleisdriven.Theengine,axle orotherpartscouldbedamaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a traileristowed, donot drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and donot make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine and other part of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance Schedule.” Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information. When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR, or GCWR, ratings.

WARNING!

Impropertowingcanleadtoacollision.Followthese guidelinestomakeyourtrailertowingassafeas possible:

• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel. When trailering cargothatis not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control. You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision.
• Whenhaulingcargoortowingatrailer, donot overloadyourvehicleortrailer. Overloading can causealossofcontrol, poorperformanceordamagetobrakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassisstructureortires.

WARNING!(Continued)

• Safetychainsmustalwaysbeusedbetweenyour vehicleandtrailer.Alwaysconnectthechainsto theframeorhookretainersofthevehiclehitch. Crossthechainsunderthetrailertongueandallow enoughslackforturningcorners.
• Vehicleswithtrailersshouldnotbeparkedona grade. Whenparking, applytheparkingbrakeon thetowvehicle. Putthetowvehicleautomatic transmissioninPARK. Alwaysblockor"chock"the trailerwheels.
  • GCWRmustnotbeexceeded.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Totalweightmustbedistributedbetweenthetow vehicleandthetrailersuchthatthefollowingfour ratingsarenotexceeded:
  1.GVWR
  2.GTW
  3.GAWR
• Tongueweightratingforthetralerhitchutilized.

TowingRequirements-Tires

• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to "Tires – General Information" in "Starting and Operating" for proper tire inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer. Refer to "Tires – General Information" in "Starting and Operating" for the proper inspection procedure.

- When replacing tires, refer to "Tires – General Information" in "Starting and Operating" for the proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits.

TowingRequirements–TrailerBrakes

- Do notinterconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury.

• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg).

CAUTION!

If the trailer weighsmorethan 1,000 lbs (454 kg) loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity. Failure to this could lead to accelerated brakelining wear, higher brake pedaleffort, and longer stopping distances.

WARNING!

• Donotconnecttrailerbrakestoyourvehicle's hydraulicbrakelines.Itcanoverloadyourbrake systemandcauseittofail.Youmightnothave brakeswhenyouneedthemandcouldhavea collision.
• Towinganytrailerwillincreaseyourstopping distance. Whentowingyoushouldallowforadditionalspacebetweenyourvehicleandthevehicleinfrontofyou.Failurertodosocouldresultina collision.

TowingRequirements–TrailerLightsAndWiring

Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety.

The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector.

NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness.

The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer to the following illustrations.

410 STARTING AND OPERATING

graph TD
    A["6"] --> B[" "]
    C["5"] --> D[" "]
    E["4"] --> F[" "]
    G["3"] --> H[" "]
    B --> I[" "]
    D --> J[" "]
    F --> K[" "]
    H --> L[" "]
    I --> M["1"]
    J --> N["2"]

057003766
Four-PinConnector

1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn

graph TD
    1 --> 2
    2 --> 3
    3 --> 4
    4 --> 5
    5 --> 6
    6 --> 7
    7 --> 1

057003765
Seven-PinConnector

1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes

Towing Tips

Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, and backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic.

ManualTransmission-IfEquipped

If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing, all starts must be in first gear to avoid excessive clutch slippage.

AutomaticTransmission

The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. However, if frequent shifting or changes in engine speed occur while in this range, use the AutoStick® shift control to select a lower gear ratio.

NOTE: Using a lower gear ratio while operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup. This action will also provide better engine braking.

If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation, then change the transmission fluid and filter as specified for "police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing." Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper maintenance intervals.

AutoStick®-IfEquipped

When using the AutoStick® shift control, select the highest gear that allows for adequate performance and avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose "4" if the desired speed can be maintained. Choose "3" or "2" if needed to maintain the desired speed.

412 STARTING AND OPERATING

To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necessary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road conditions allow.

ElectronicSpeedControl-IfEquipped

• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency.

CoolingSystem

To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:

CityDriving

When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.

HighwayDriving

Reduce speed.

AirConditioning

Turn off temporarily.

RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle

TowingCondition	WheelsOFFthe Ground	Manual Transmission	AutomaticTransmission
Flat Tow None		•Transmission in NEUTRAL•Key in ACC Position	NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow Front OK (FWD Only) OK (FWD Only)
Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer All OK OK

414 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: Vehicles equipped with manual transmissions may be recreationally towed (flat towed) at any legal highway speed, for any distance, if the manual transmission is in NEUTRAL and the ignition key is in the ACC position.

CAUTION!

• DONOTflattowanyvehicleequippedwithan automatictransmission.Damagethodrivetrain willresult.Ifthesevehiclesrequiretowing,make surealldrivewheelsareOFFtheground.
• DONOTdollytowany4WDvehicle.Internal damagetothetransmissionortransfercasewill occurifadollyisusedwhenrecreationaltowing.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CONTENTS

■HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS .....416
■IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS .....416
■AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OVERHEATING....418
■JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING....418

□Jack Location....419
□Spare Tire Stowage....419
□Preparations For Jacking....420
□Jacking Instructions....420

□Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427

■JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES .....430

□Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
□Jump-Starting Procedure....432

■FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE....434
■SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE .....436
■ TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE.....437

□With Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438

416 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS

The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the instrument panel below the climate controls.

Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc-

tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.

This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.

When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.

NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery.

IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS

In any of the following situations, you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.

• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.

NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition:

• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system.

CAUTION!

Drivingwithahotcoolingsystemcoulddamage yourvehicle.IfthepointerrisestotheH(red)mark, theinstrumentclusterwillsoundachime.When safe,pulloverandstopthevehiclewiththeengineat idle.Turnofftheairconditioningandwaituntilthe pointeddropsbackintothenormalrange.Ifthe pointerremainsontheH(red)markformorethana minute,turntheengineoffimmediatelyandcallfor service.

WARNING!

Youorotherscanbebadlyburnedbyhotengine coolant(antifreeze)orsteamfromyourradiator.If youseeorhearsteamcomingfromunderthehood, donotopenthehooduntiltheradiatorhashadtime tocool.Nevertrytoopenacoolingsystempressure capwhetheradiatororcoolantbottleishot.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OVERHEATING

During sustained high speed driving or trailer towing up long grades on hot days, the automatic transmission oil may become too hot.

If this happens, the transmission overheat indicator light will come on, and the vehicle will slow slightly until the automatic transmission cools down enough to allow a return to the

requested speed. If the high speed is maintained, the overheating may reoccur, as before, in a cyclic fashion.

JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING

WARNING!

• Donotattempttochangeatireonthesideofthe vehicleclosetomovingtraffic.Pullfarenoughoff theroadtoavoidthedangerofbeinghitwhen operatingthejackorchangingthewheel.
• Beingunderajacked-upvehicleisdangerous. The vehiclecouldslipoffthejackandfallonyou. You couldbecrushed. Neverputanypartofyourbody underavehiclethatisonajack. If youneedtoget underaraisedvehicle, takeittoaservicecenter whereitcanberaisedonalift.
• Neverstartorruntheenginewhilethevehicleis onajack.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Thejackisdesignedtobeusedasatoolfor changingtiresonly. Thejackshouldnotbeusedto liftthevehicleforservicepurposes. Thevehicle shouldbejackedonafirmlevelsurfaceonly. Avoidiceorslipperyareas.

Jack Location

The jack and jack-handle are stowed under the load floor in the cargo area.

Top-down view of a car wheel assembly with a black arrow pointing to the wheel (no text or symbols visible)

SpareTireAndJackStowage

Spare Tire Stowage

The compact spare tire is stowed under the rear load floor in the cargo area.

SpareTireRemoval

Lift up the load floor cover and remove the hold down.

420 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Preparations For Jacking

1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoiding ice or slippery areas.

WARNING!

Donotattempttochangeatireonthesideofthe vehicleclosetomovingtraffic,pullfarenoughoff theroadtoavoidthedangerofbeinghitwhen operatingthejackorchangingthewheel.

1. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Place the shift lever in PARK (automatic transmission) or REVERSE (manual transmission).

4. Turn OFF the ignition.

5. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally

opposite the jacking position. For example, if changing the right front tire, block the left rear wheel.

NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle while the vehicle is being jacked.

Jacking Instructions

WARNING!

Carefully follow the set of receiving warning to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:

- Alwaysparkonafirm, levelsurfaceasfarfromthe edgeoftheroadwayaspossiblebeforeraisingthe vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• TurnontheHazardWarningflasher.
- Blockthewheeldiagonallyoppositethewheelto beraised.
- Settheparkingbrakefirmlyandsetanautomatic transmissioninPARK;amanualtransmissionin REVERSE.
- Neverstartorruntheenginewiththevehicleona jack.
- Donotletanyonesitinthevehiclewhenitisona jack.
- Donotgetunderthevehiclewhenitisonajack.If youneedtogetunderaraisedvehicle,takeittoa servicecenterwhereitcanberaisedonalift.
- Onlyusethejackinthepositionsindicatedandfor liftingthisvehicleduringatirechange.

WARNING!(Continued)

• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful of motortraffic.
• Toassurethatsparetires,flatorinflated,are securelystowed,sparesmustbestowedwiththe valvestemfacingout.

(Continued)

422 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

PRND3L P R

060600714

JackWarningLabel

CAUTION!

Donotattempttoraisethevehiclebyjackingon locationsotherthanthoseindicatedintheJacking Instructionsforthisvehicle.

NOTE: Refer to "Tires — General Information" in "Starting And Operating" for further information about the spare tire, it's use, and operation.

1. Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the spare wheel as an assembly. Turn the jack screw to the left to loosen the lug wrench and remove the wrench from the jack assembly.

NOTE: The jack handle attaches to the side of the jack with two attachment points. When the jack is partially expanded, the tension between the two attachment points holds the jack handle in place.

Mechanical tool assembly diagram showing a clamping device with rotating arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

060600626

RemovingJackHandleFromJack

1. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground.

NOTE: There are front and rear jacking locations on each side of the body. The front locations are outlined by two triangular cutouts on one of the flanges in the sill flange

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 423

assembly. The rear location is the same but with two rectangular cutouts. For vehicles equipped with plastic trim, the plastic has been cut away to expose the jacking locations in the body.

Side view of a black SUV with two close-up insets showing mechanical components (no text or symbols visible)

JackingLocations

424 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CAUTION!

Donotattempttoraisethevehiclebyjackingon locationsotherthanthoseindicated.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a frame-like structure with two arrows pointing to a component detail (no text or symbols present)

FrontJackingLocation

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a bracket with mounting feet and a close-up of the wheel (no text or symbols visible)

RearJackingLocation

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 425

Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged.

1. Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be placed under the jacking location. Once the jack is positioned, turn the jack screw to the right until the jack head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the wheel to be changed.

the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.

1. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel and wheel covers, where applicable, off the hub. Install the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the nuts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts.

WARNING!

Raisingthevehiclehigherthannecessarycanmake thevehiclelessstable.Itcouldslipoffthejackand hurtsomeonearit.Raisethevehicleonlyenough toremovethetire.

1. Using the swivel wrench raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right. Raise the vehicle only until

WARNING!

To avoid the riskofforcing the vehicle off the jack, donottightenthe wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury.

426 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Close-up of hands adjusting a car tire with a black arrow pointing to the wheel (no text or symbols visible)

MountingSpareTire

CAUTION!

Besuretomountthesparetirewiththevalvestem facingoutward. Thevehiclecouldbedamagedifthe sparetireismountedincorrectly.

WARNING!

To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp edges.

NOTE: The wheel cover is held on the wheel by the wheel nuts. When reinstalling the original wheel, properly align the wheel cover to the valve stem, place the wheel cover onto the wheel, then install the wheel nuts.

1. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
2. Finish tightening the nuts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice. The correct wheel nut torque is 100 ft lbs (135 N·m). If you doubt that you have

tightened the nuts correctly, have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service station.

1. Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is free. Release the parking brake. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the assembly using the means provided.

WARNING!

Aloosetireorjackthrownforwardinacollisionor hardstopcouldendangertheoccupantsofthevehicle.Alwaysstowthejackpartsandthesparetirein theplacesprovided.

1. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area, have the tirerepairedorreplacedassoonaspossible.

WARNING!

Aloosetirethrownforwardinacollisionorhard stopcouldinjuretheoccupantsinthevehicle.Have thedeflated(flat)tirerepairedorreplacedimmediately.

1. Check the spare tire pressure as soon as possible. Correct the tire pressure as required.

Road Tire Installation

VehiclesEquippedWithWheelCovers

1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand. Do not use a hammer or excessive force to install the cover.

428 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Technical diagram of a vehicle suspension system with numbered components

060668307

TireAndWheelCoverOrCenterCap

1 — Valve Stem 4 — Wheel Cover
2 — Valve Notch 5 — Road Wheel
3 — Wheel Lug Nut

1. Install the five wheel lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.

WARNING!

To avoid the riskofforcing the vehicle off the jack, donottight enthe lugnuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury.

1. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
2. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice. The correct tightness of each lug nut is 100 ft/lbs (135 N·m). If in doubt

about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service station.

1. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel.

VehiclesWithoutWheelCovers

1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, donot fully tight enthe lug nuts until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury.

1. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.

2. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice. The correct tightness of each lug nut is 100 ft/lbs (135 N·m). If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service station.

3. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel.

JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES

If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.

NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions.

CAUTION!

Donotuseaportablebatteryboosterpackorany otherboostersourcewithasystemvoltagegreater than12Voltsordamagetothebattery, startermotor, alternatororelectricalsystemmayoccur.

WARNING!

Donotattemptjump-startingifthebatteryisfrozen. Itcouldruptureorexplodeandcausepersonalinjury.

Preparations For Jump-Start

The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the engine compartment below the air intake duct. To access the battery remove the air intake duct by turning the two finger screws, located on the radiator support.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 431

Mechanical assembly diagram showing engine components and directional arrows (no text or symbols)

Interior view of a car engine bay with visible hoses and components, no text or symbols present

AirIntakeFingerScrewsPositiveBatteryPost

432 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING!

• Takecaretoavoidtheradiatorcoolingfanwheneverthehoodisraised.ItcanstartanytimetheignitionswitchisON.Youcanbeinjuredbymovingfanblades.
- Removeanymetaljewelrysuchasrings, watch bandsandbraceletsthatcouldmakeaninadvertent electricalcontact. Youcouldbeseriouslyinjured.
- Batteriescontainsulfuricacidthatcanburnyour skinoreyesandgeneratehydrogengaswhichis flammableandexplosive.Keepopenflamesor sparksawayfromthebattery.

1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK (manual transmission to NEUTRAL) and turn the ignition to LOCK.

2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.

3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.

WARNING!

Donotallowvehiclestotoucheachotherasthis couldestablishagroundconnectionandpersonal injurycouldresult.

Jump-Starting Procedure

WARNING!

Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or property damaged by a battery explosion.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle orthedischarged vehicle.

NOTE: Remove Air Intake before proceeding with this Jump-Starting procedure.

1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)jumper cable to the positive (+)post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)jumper cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of

the discharged vehicle's engine) away from the battery and the fuel injection system.

WARNING!

Donotconnectthecabletothenegativepost(-)ofthe dischargedbattery. Theresultingelectricalspark could causethe battery to explode and could result in personal injury.

1. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
   Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence:

2. Disconnect the negative (-)jumper cable from the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery.

3. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.

4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
5. Disconnect the positive (+)end of the jumper cable from the positive (+)post of the discharged vehicle.
6. Reinstall the air intake duct.

If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer.

CAUTION!

Accessoriespluggedintothevehiclepoweroutlets drawpowerfromthevehicle'sbattery,evenwhennot inuse(i.e.,cellularphones,etc.).Eventually,if

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

pluggedinlongenoughwithoutengineoperation, thevehicle'sbatterywilldischargesufficientlyto degradebatterylifeand/orpreventtheenginefrom starting.

FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE

If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or 2nd gear and REVERSE (with manual transmission), while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels, or racing the engine.

CAUTION!

Racingtheengineorspinningthewheelsmayleadto transmissionoverheatingandfailure.AllowtheenginetoidlewiththetransmissioninNEUTRALforat leastoneminuteaftereveryfiverocking-motion cycles.Thiswillminimizeoverheatingandreduce theriskoftransmissionfailureduringprolonged effortstofreeastuckvehicle.

NOTE: Press the "ESC Off" switch, to place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in "Partial Off" mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to "Electronic Brake Control" in "Starting And Operating" for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, press the "ESC Off" switch again to restore "ESC On" mode.

CAUTION!

• When "rocking" astuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE/2nd gear and REVERSE, donot spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drive train damagemay result.
• Revvingtheengineorspinningthewheelstoofast mayleadtotransmissionoverheatingandfailure. Itcanalsodamagethetires.Donotspinthewheels above30mph(48km/h)whileingear(notransmissionshiftingoccurring).

WARNING!

Fastspinningtirescanbedangerous. Forcesgenerated by excessive wheels speeds may caused damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. Atire could

(Continued)

436 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING!(Continued)

explode and injuresomeone. Donotspinyourvehicle'swheelsfasterthan30mph(48km/h)orfor longerthan30secondscontinuouslywithoutstoppingwhenyouarestuckanddonotletanyonenear aspinningwheel,nomatterwhatthespeed.

If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position, you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:

1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the shift lever override access cover (located on the right side of the shifter housing).

Interior view of a car gear shift lever with an upward arrow indicator (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

ShiftLeverOverrideAccessCover

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position, but do not start the engine.

2. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.

3. Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into the access port, and push and hold the override release lever forward.

4. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.

5. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.

6. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover.

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial wrecker service.

TowingConditionWheels	OFFtheGroundManualTransmissionAutomaticTransmission
Flat Tow NONE		• Transmission in NEUTRAL• Key in ACC or ON/RUN position	NOTALLOWED
Wheel Lift or Dolly Tow	Front	FWD Models ONLY	FWD Models ONLY
	Rear	NOTALLOWED	NOTALLOWED
Flatbed	ALL	BEST METHOD	BEST METHOD

438 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

With Ignition Key

AutomaticTransmission

• Front Wheel Drive (FWD) vehicles can be towed with the front wheels elevated, or on a flatbed truck (all four wheels OFFthe ground).
• Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) vehicles must be towed on a flatbed truck (all four wheels OFFthe ground).

CAUTION!

• DONOTflattowanyvehicleequippedwithan automatictransmission.Damagetothedrivetrain willresult.
• Towing this vehicle inviolation of the aboverequirements can cause severetransmission and/or transfercased damage. Damage from impropertowing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

ManualTransmission

• Front Wheel Drive (FWD) or Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) vehicles can be flat towed (all four wheels on the ground) with the transmission in NEUTRAL.
• FWD vehicles can be towed with the front wheels elevated.
• FWD or 4WD vehicles can be towed on a flatbed truck (all wheels OFFthe ground).

CAUTION!

DONOTflattowanydisabledvehicleifconditionis relatedtotheclutch, transmissionordriveline.Additionaldamagetothedrivetraincouldresult.

AllTransmissions

If you must use the accessories (wipers, defroster, etc.) while being towed, the key must be in the ON/RUN position, not the ACC position. Make certain the transmission remains in NEUTRAL.

If the vehicle's battery is discharged, see "Shift Lever Override" in this section for instructions on shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK for towing.

CAUTION!

DONOTusesling-typeequipmentwhentowing. Whensecuringthevehicletoaflatbedtruck, donot attachtofrontorrearsuspensioncomponents. Damagetoyourvehiclemayresultfromimpropertowing.

WithoutTheIgnitionKey

Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK/OFF position. The only approved method of towing without the ignition key is with a flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

■ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.0L . . . . . . . . . . .443

■ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

■ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — O B D I I ....445

□Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message .....445

■EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS....446

■REPLACEMENT PARTS....447

■DEALER SERVICE....447

■MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES....448

□Engine Oil....449

□Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

□Engine Air Cleaner Filter .....452

□Maintenance-Free Battery .....452

□Air Conditioner Maintenance .....454

□Body Lubrication....457

□Windshield Wiper Blades .....457

□Adding Washer Fluid .458

□Exhaust System....458

□Cooling System....461

442 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

□Brake System....466
□Automatic Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . .469
□Manual Transmission – If Equipped .....471
☐Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) – AWD/4WD Models Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
□Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – AWD/4WD Models Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
□Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion....472

■FUSES....480

□Integrated Power Module....480

■VEHICLE STORAGE....484

■REPLACEMENT BULBS....485

■BULB REPLACEMENT....486

□Headlamps....486
□Fog Lamps....486
□Rear Turn Signal And Backup Lamp . . . . . . . . 487
□License Lamps....487
□Center High-Mounted Stoplamp .....487

■FLUID CAPACITIES....488

■FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS....489

□Engine....489

□Chassis....490

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.0L

Labeled diagram of a car engine bay with numbered parts for identification

1 — Washer Fluid Reservoir 6 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 7 — Coolant Pressure Cap
3 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
5 — Integrated Power Module (Fuses)

444 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L

Labeled diagram of a car engine bay with numbered parts for identification

1 — Washer Fluid Reservoir 6 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 7 — Coolant Pressure Cap
3 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
5 — Integrated Power Module (Fuses)

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II

Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.

If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.

CAUTION!

• ProlongeddrivingwiththeMILoncouldcause furtherdamagetotheemissioncontrolsystem.It couldalsoaffectfueleconomyanddrivability.The vehiclemustbeservicedbeforeanyemissionstests canbeperformed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running, severecatalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediately service is required.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message

After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose or improperly installed. A "gASCAP" message will be displayed in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas cap until a "clicking" sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened. Press the trip odometer RESET button to turn off the message. If the problem

446 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

persists, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off.

EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions control system. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.

For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the "Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)" is functioning and is not on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is ready for testing.

Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.

Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test, which you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not crank or start the engine.
2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this test over.

3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.

4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will happen:

5. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is notready and you should not proceed to the I/M station.

6. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.

If your OBD II system is notready, you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update. A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready.

Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running.

REPLACEMENT PARTS

Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer's warranty.

DEALER SERVICE

Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are

448 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

available which include detailed service information for your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

WARNING!

Youcanbebadlyinjuredworkingonorarounda motorvehicle.Onlydoserviceworkforwhichyou havetheknowledgeandtheproperequipment.Ifyou haveanydoubtaboutyourabilitytoperformaservice job,takeyourvehicletoacompetentmechanic.

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle.

Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule, there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future.

CAUTION!

• Failuretoproperlymaintainyourvehicleorperformrepairsandservicewhennecessarycould resultinmorecostlyrepairs,damagetoother componentsornegativelyimpactvehicleperformance.Immediatelyhavepotentialmalfunctions examinedbyanauthorizeddealerorqualified repaircenter.
• Yourvehiclehasbeenbuiltwithimprovedfluids thatprotecttheperformanceanddurabilityofyour vehicleandalsoallowextendedmaintenanceintervals.Donotusechemicalflushesinthesecomponentsasthechemicalscandamageyourengine,

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

transmission, powersteeringorairconditioning. SuchdamageisnotcoveredbytheNewVehicle LimitedWarranty. Ifaflushisneededbecauseof componentmalfunction, useonlythespecified fluidfortheflushingprocedure.

Engine Oil

CheckingOilLevel

To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat overnight. Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will give you an incorrect reading.

Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and only when the engine is hot, will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the range markings on the dipstick. The range markings will consist of a crosshatch zone that says SAFE or a cross-hatch zone that says MIN at the low end of the range and MAX at the high end of the range. Adding 1 qt (1L) of oil when the reading is at the low end of the indicated range will result in the oil level at the full end of the indicator range.

CAUTION!

Donotoverfilltheengine. Overfillingtheengine will cause oilaeration, which can lead to lossofoil pressure and an increase in oil temperature. This could damage your engine. Also, besure the oilfill cap is replaced and tightened after adding oil.

450 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

ChangeEngineOil

The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for further information.

NOTE: Undernocircumstances should doil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelvemonths, whichever occurs first.

EngineOilSelection

For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.

AmericanPetroleumInstitute(API)EngineOil IdentificationSymbol

AMERICAN PETROLEUM INSTITUTE FOR GASOLINE ENGINES CERTIFIED

This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils.

CAUTION!

Donotusechemicalflushesinyourengineoilasthe chemicalscandamageyourengine.Suchdamageis notcoveredbytheNewVehicleLimitedWarranty.

EngineOilViscosity(SAEGrade)

SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil filler cap also states the recommended engine oil viscosity grade for your engine.

Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.

SyntheticEngineOils

You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed.

MaterialsAddedToEngineOil

The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.

DisposingOfUsedEngineOilAndOilFilters

Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.

Engine Oil Filter

The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change.

452 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

EngineOilFilterSelection

This manufacturer's engines have a full-flow type oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter

Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper maintenance intervals.

WARNING!

Theairinductionsystem(aircleaner,hoses,etc.)can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire. Donotremovetheairinduction system (air cleaner, hoses,etc.) unless such removal is necessary

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

forrepairormaintenance.Makesurethatnooneis neartheenginecompartmentbeforestartingthe vehiclewiththeairinductionsystem(aircleaner, hoses,etc.)removed.Failureretodosocanresultin seriouspersonalinjury.

EngineAirCleanerFilterSelection

The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.

Maintenance-Free Battery

Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.

WARNING!

• Batteryfluidisacorrosiveacidsolutionandcan burnorevenblindyou.Donotallowbatteryfluidto contactyoureyes,skin,orclothing.Donotleanover abatterywhenattachingclamps.Ifacidsplashesin eyesoronskin,flushtheareaimmediatelywith largeamountsofwater.Referto"Jump-Starting Procedures"in"WhatToDoInEmergencies"for furtherinformation.
• Batterygasisflammableandexplosive.Keep flameorsparksawayfromthebattery.Donotuse aboosterbatteryoranyotherboostersourcewith anoutputgreaterthan12Volts.Donotallowcable clampstotoucheachother.
• Batteryposts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Washhands after handling.

WARNING!(Continued)

• Thebatteryinthisvehiclehasaventhosethat shouldnotbedisconnectedandshouldonlybe replacedwithabatteryofthesametype(vented).

CAUTION!

• It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and then negative cable is attached to the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• Ifa "fastcharger" is used while the battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a "fastcharger" to provide starting voltage.

(Continued)

454 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Air Conditioner Maintenance

For best possible performance, your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season. This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.

CAUTION!

Donotusechemicalflushesinyourairconditioning systemasthechemicalscandamageyourairconditioningcomponents.Suchdamageisnotcoveredby theNewVehicleLimitedWarranty.

WARNING!

• Useonlyrefrigerantsandcompressorlubricants approvedbythemanufacturerforyourairconditioningsystem.Someunapprovedrefrigerantsare flammableandcanexplode,injuringyou.Other unapprovedrefrigerantsorlubricantscancausethe systemtofail,requiringcostlyrepairs.Referto WarrantyInformationBook,locatedontheDVD, forfurtherwarrantyinformation.
• The airconditioningsystem contains refrigerant underhigh pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring linestobedisconnected should bed one by an experienced technician.

RefrigerantRecoveryAndRecycling

R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.

NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor oil, and refrigerants.

A/CAirFilter

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.

WARNING!

DonotremovetheA/Cairfilterwhilethebloweris operatingorpersonalinjurymayresult.

The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the glove box. Perform the following procedure to replace the filter:

1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
2. Push in on the sides of the glove compartment and lower the door.
3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.

456 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

1. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter cover to the HVAC housing, and remove the cover.

Illustration of a mechanical device with two upward arrows pointing to features (no text or symbols)

A/CAirFilterReplacement

1. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of the housing.

2. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the filter pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the cover.

CAUTION!

The A/Cairfilter is identified with an arrow to indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure to properly install the filter will result in the need to replace it more often.

1. Rotate the glove compartment door back into position.

Body Lubrication

Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.

The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR® Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.

Windshield Wiper Blades

Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.

Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.

Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.

NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.

Adding Washer Fluid

The washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment, and the fluid level should be checked at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).

When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance. To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers.

WARNING!

Commerciallyavailablewindshieldwashersolvents areflammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washers solution.

Exhaust System

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.

If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the

exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

WARNING!

• Exhaustgasescaninjureorkill. They contain carbonmonoxide(CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to "Safety Tips/ExhaustGas" in "Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle" for further information.
• Ahotexhaustsystemcanstartafireifyoupark overmaterialsthatcanburn.Suchmaterialsmight begrassorleavescomingintocontactwithyour exhaustsystem.Donotparkoroperateyourvehicleinareaswhereyourehaustsystemcancontactanythingthatcanburn.

CAUTION!

• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and causes serious damage to the engine.
• Damagetothecatalyticconvertercanresultifyour vehicleisnotkeptinproperoperatingcondition. Intheeventofenginemalfunction, particularly involvingenginemisfireorotherapparentlossof performance,haveyourvehicleservicedpromptly. Continuedoperationofyourvehiclewithasevere malfunctioncouldcausetheconvertertooverheat, resultinginpossibledamagetothecverterand vehicle.

460 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer's specifications, should be obtained immediately.

To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:

• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition, when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.

Cooling System

WARNING!

• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch in the ON position.
• Youorotherscanbebadlyburnedbyhotengine coolant(antifreeze)orsteamfromyourradiator.If youseeorhearsteamcomingfromunderthehood, donotopenthehooduntiltheradiatorhashad timetocool.Nevertrytoopenacoolingsystem pressurecapwhentheradiatorishot.

CoolantChecks

Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in appearance, the system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh engine coolant (anti-freeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser.

Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks.

CoolingSystem-Drain,Flush,AndRefill

If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible sediment, clean and flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106.

Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper maintenance intervals.

SelectionOfCoolant

Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.

CAUTION!

- Mixingofenginecoolant(antifreeze)otherthan specifiedOrganicAdditiveTechnology(OAT)enginecoolant(antifreeze),mayresultinengine

CAUTION!(Continued)

damageandmaydecreasecorrosionprotection. OrganicAdditiveTechnology(OAT)enginecool-antisdifferentandshouldnotbemixedwith HybridOrganicAdditiveTechnology(HOAT)enginecoolant(antifreeze)orany"globallycompatible"coolant(antifreeze).Ifanon-OATengine coolant(antifreeze)isintroducedintothecooling systeminanemergency,itshouldbeflushedwith OATcoolantandreplacedwiththespecifiedOAT enginecoolant(antifreeze)assoonaspossible.

- Donotusewateraloneoralcohol-basedengine coolant(antifreeze)products.Donotuseadditional rustinhibitorsorantirustproducts,astheymaynot becompatiblewiththeradiatorenginecoolantand mayplugtheradiator.

(Continued)

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

- This vehicle has not been designed for use with propyleneglycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propyleneglycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.

AddingCoolant

Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) throughout the life of your vehicle.

Please review these recommendations for using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 463

that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):

• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70% ) if temperatures below -34^ (-37^) are anticipated.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.

Please note that it is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated.

NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage. Drain, flush, and refill as soon as possible to avoid damage if coolant types are mixed in an emergency.

CoolingSystemPressureCap

The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle.

The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.

WARNING!

• The warning words "DONOTOPENHOT" on the cooling system pressure cap areas safety precaution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is overheated. Donot loosen or remove the captocoolan overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure.
• Donotuseapressurecapotherthantheone specifiedforyourvehicle.Personalinjuryorenginedamagemayresult.

DisposalOfUsedEngineCoolant

Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal

rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.

CoolantLevel

The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the engine idling and warm to normal operating temperature, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the “ADD” and “FULL” lines shown on the bottle.

The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for the coolant freeze point or replacing the engine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.

When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.

PointsToRemember

NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.

If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.

- Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.

466 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (anti-freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion bottle must also be protected against freezing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are required, the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the condenser clean.

- Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.

Brake System

In order to assure brake system performance, all brake system components should be inspected periodically. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.

WARNING!

Ridingthebrakescanleadtobrakefailureand possiblyacollision.Drivingwithyourfootrestingor ridingonthebrakepedalcanresultinabnormally

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

highbraketemperatures,excessiveliningwear,and possiblebrakedamage.Youwouldnothaveyourfull brakingcapacityinanemergency.

BrakeMasterCylinder

The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked when performing under hood services, or immediately if the brake system warning light is on.

Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear. The brake fluid level should be checked when the pads are replaced. However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 467

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a manual transmission, the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to both the brake system and the clutch release system. The two systems are separated in the reservoir, and a leak in one system will not affect the other system. The manual transmission clutch release system should not require fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle. If the brake fluid reservoir is low and the brake system does not indicate any leaks or other problems, it may be a result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch release system. See your local authorized dealer for service.

Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.

WARNING!

• Useonlymanufacturer's recommended brake fluid. Referto "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brakes system and/or impair its performance. The property of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture, use only new brake fluidor fluid thathas been in atightly closed container. Keep them master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluidina open container absorbsmoisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may

WARNING!(Continued)

causeittoboilunexpectedlyduringhardorprolongedbraking,resultinginsuddenbrakefailure. Thiscouldresultinacollision.

• Overfillingthebrakefluidreservoircanresultin spillingbrakefluidonhotengineparts, causing thebrakefluidtocatchfire. Brakefluidcanalso damagepaintedandvinylsurfaces, careshouldbe takentoavoiditscontactwiththesesurfaces.

- Donotallowpetroleumbasedfluidtocontaminate thebrakefluid.Brakesealcomponentscouldbe damaged,causingpartialorcompletebrakefailure. Thiscouldresultinacollision.

CAUTION!

Useofimproperbrakefluidswillaffectoverallclutch systemperformance.Improperbrakefluidsmaydamagetheclutchsystemresultinginlossofclutchfunctionandtheabilitytoshiftthetransmission.

Automatic Transmission – If Equipped

SelectionOfLubricant(CVT)

It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use only the manufacturer's recommended transmission fluid which has the special friction coefficient additives necessary for proper steel belt traction on the drive and driven pulleys. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in this section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid.

No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should be used.

CAUTION!

Usingatransmissionfluidotherthanthemanufacurer'srecommendedfluidmaycausebeltslipand resultinacompletetransmissionfailure!Referto "Fluids,Lubricants,andGenuineParts" in "MaintainingYourVehicle" forfluidspecifications.

SpecialAdditives

The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any special additives in the transmission.

Automatic transmission fluid is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this policy is the use of

470 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals.

CAUTION!

Donotusechemicalflushesinyourtransmissionas thechemicalscandamageyourtransmissioncomponents.SuchdamageisnotcoveredbytheNew VehicleLimitedWarranty.

FluidLevelCheck

The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level using special service tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit you authorized dealer immediately to have the

fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.

CAUTION!

Ifatransmissionfluidleakoccurs,visityourauthorizeddealerimmediately.Severetransmissiondamagemayoccur.Yourauthorizeddealerhastheproper toolstoadjustthefluidlevelaccurately.

FluidAndFilterChanges

Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper maintenance intervals. In addition, change the fluid and filter if the transmission is disassembled for any reason.

Manual Transmission – If Equipped

LubricantSelection

Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission fluid. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.

FluidLevelCheck

Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a point not more than 3/16 in (4.7 mm) below the bottom of the hole.

Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.

FrequencyOfFluidChange

Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubricant has become contaminated with water.

NOTE: If contaminated with water, the fluid should be changed immediately.

Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) – AWD/4WD Models Only

LubricantSelection

Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission fluid. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.

FluidLevelCheck

Visually inspect the unit at each oil change for leakage. If leakage is detected, check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid level should be maintained between the bottom of the fill hole to 1/8 in (4 mm) below the fill hole.

Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.

472 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

FrequencyOfFluidChange

Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" for the proper maintenance intervals.

Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – AWD/4WD Models Only

LubricantSelection

Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.

FluidLevelCheck

Visually inspect the unit at each oil change for leakage. If leakage is detected, Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid level should be maintained between the bottom of the fill hole to 1/8 in (4 mm) below the fill hole.

Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.

FrequencyOfFluidChange

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.

Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion ProtectionOfBodyAndPaintFromCorrosion

Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-body protection.

The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.

WhatCausesCorrosion?

Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.

The most common causes are:

• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.

Washing

• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR® Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.

474 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

• Donotuseabrasiveorstrongcleaningmaterials suchassteelwoolorscouringpowderthatwill scratchmetalandpaintedsurfaces.
• Useofpowerwashersexceeding1,200psi(8274kPa) canresultindamageorremovalofpaintanddecals.

SpecialCare

• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a month.

• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and open.

• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.

• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.

WheelAndWheelTrimCare

All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle.

Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel's protective coating that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing.

NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the wheel surface.

CAUTION!

Avoidproductsorautomaticcarwashesthatuse acidicsolutionsorstrongalkalineadditivesorharsh brushes. Theseproductsandautomaticcarwashes maydamagethewheel'sprotectivefinish. Such damageisnotcoveredbytheNewVehicleLimited Warranty. Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel Cleanerorequivalentisrecommended.

When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor or Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will permanently

476 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

CAUTION!

Donotusescouringpads,steelwool,abristlebrush, metalpolishesorovencleaner. Theseproductsmay damagethewheel'sprotectivefinish.Suchdamageis notcoveredbytheNewVehicleLimitedWarranty. Onlycarwashsoap,MOPARWheelCleaneror equivalentisrecommended.

NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing so. Driving the vehicle and applying the brakes when stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor corrosion.

DarkVaporOrBlackSatinChromeWheels

CAUTION!

If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black Satin Chromewheels DONOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY MILDSOAP AND WATER WITH ASOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is required to maintain this finish.

StainRepelFabricCleaningProcedure-IfEquipped

Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:

- Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean, dry towel.

• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products.

InteriorCare

Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting.

Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.

MOPAR® Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery.

Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR® Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition.

WARNING!

Donotusevolatilesolventsforcleaningpurposes. Manyarepotentiallyflammable,andifusedin closedareastheymaycauserespiratoryharm.

478 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CleaningHeadlights

Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.

Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.

To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.

Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.

GlassSurfaces

All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear

quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.

When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.

InstrumentPanelCover

The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which minimizes reflections on the windshield. Do not use protectants or other products which may cause undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the low glare surface.

InstrumentPanelBezels

CAUTION!

Wheninstallinghangingairfreshenersinyourvehicle,readtheinstallationinstructionscarefully. Someairfreshenerswilldamagethefinishof paintedordecoratedpartsifallowedtodirectly contactanysurface.

CleaningPlasticInstrumentClusterLenses

The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.

1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp rag.

2. Dry with a soft cloth.

SeatBeltMaintenance

Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.

If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR® Total Clean, a mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.

Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly.

480 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

FUSES

Integrated Power Module

The Integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment near the air cleaner assembly. This center contains cartridge fuses and mini-fuses. A label that identifies each component may be printed on the inside of the cover. Refer to "Engine Compartment" in "Maintaining Your Vehicle" for further information.

Close-up of a car engine bay with visible components and a black arrow pointing to a component (no text or symbols)

IntegratedPowerModule

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 481

CavityCartridgeFuse	Mini-Fuse	Description
1 Empty Empty
2 15 Amp	Lt Blue	AWD/4WD Control Module – If Equipped
3 10 Amp	Red	Rear Center Brake Light Switch
4 10 Amp	Red	Ignition Switch/Occupant Classification Module
5 20 Amp	Yellow	Trailer Tow – If Equipped
6 10 Amp	Red	Power Mirror/Steering Control Satellite Radio/Hands-Free Phone

Cavity	Cartridge Fuse	Mini-Fuse	Description
7 30	Amp	Green	Ignition Off Draw
8 30	Amp	Green	Ignition Off Draw
9 40	Amp Green		Power Seats
10 20	Amp	Yellow	Power Locks/Interior Lighting
11 15	Amp	Lt Blue	Power Outlet
12 20	Amp	Yellow	115V AC Inverter – If Equipped
13 20	Amp	Yellow	Cigar Lighter

482 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity	Cartridge Fuse	Mini-Fuse	Description
14 10	Amp	Red	Instrument Cluster
15 40	Amp Green		Radiator Fan
16 15	Amp	Lt Blue	Dome Lamp/ Sunroof/Rear Wiper Motor
17 10	Amp	Red	Wireless Control Module
18 40	Amp Green		Auto Shutdown Relay
19 20	Amp	Yellow	Radio Amplifiers
20 15	Amp	Lt Blue	Radio

Cavity	Cartridge Fuse	Mini-Fuse	Description
21 10	Amp	Red	Intrusion Module/ Siren – If Equipped
22 10	Amp	Red	Heating, AC/ Compass
23 15	Amp	Lt Blue	Auto Shutdown Relay
24 15	Amp	Lt Blue	Power Sunroof – If Equipped
25 10	Amp	Red	Heated Mirror – If Equipped
26 15	Amp	Lt Blue	Auto Shutdown Relay
27 10	Amp	Red	Airbag Control Module

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 483

CavityCartridgeFuse	Mini-Fuse	Description
28 10 Amp	Red	Airbag Control Module/Occupant Classification Module
29 Hot Car (No Fuse		Required)
30 20 Amp	Yellow	Heated Seat – If Equipped
31 10 Amp	Red	Headlamp Washer – If Equipped
32 30 AmpPink		Auto Shutdown Relay
33 10 Amp	Red	J1962 Conn/Powertrain Control Module

Cavity	Cartridge Fuse	Mini-Fuse	Description
34 30	AmpPink		Antilock BrakeValve
35 40	AmpGreen		Antilock Brake Pump
36 30	AmpPink		Headlamp/Washer Control/Smart Glass - If Equipped
37 25	Amp	Natural	Diesel Fuel Heater - If Equipped

CAUTION!

• WheninstallingtheIPMcover,itisimportantto ensurethecoverisproperlypositionedandfully latched.Failuretodosomayallowwatertogetinto theIPM,andpossiblyresultinanelectricalsystem failure.
• When replacing ablownfuse, it is important to use only afuse having the correct tamperagerating. The use of afuse with a rating other than indicated may result in an dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.

VEHICLE STORAGE

If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21 days, you may want to take steps to preserve your battery.

• Disengage the mini-fuse in the Power Distribution Center labeled IOD (Ignition Off-Draw).
• Or disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.

REPLACEMENT BULBS

All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement.

Interior Bulbs

	BulbNumber
Front Header Lamp T578
Center Dome Lamp T578
Rear Cargo Lamp/Flashlight	8-A35LFAA

Exterior Bulbs

	BulbNumber
Low Beam Headlamp H11
High Beam Headlamp 9005
Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp	7444NA
Front Side Marker Lamp 194
Front Fog Lamp H11
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)	LED Assembly (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Rear Tail/Stop Lamp LED	Assembly (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Rear Turn Lamp 7440NA (WY21W)	Amber
Backup Lamp 7440 (W21W)	Crystal
License Lamp W5W

486 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

BULB REPLACEMENT

Headlamps

1. Raise the hood and locate the connector behind the headlamp.
2. Reach into the engine compartment and pull the red lock out at the green connector.
3. Remove green connector from back of bulb by pulling straight back.
4. Twist the bulb to the left.
5. Pull bulb outward from assembly.

NOTE: These are halogen bulbs. Take care not to touch the bulb with your fingers. Body oils from your fingers could cause excessive heat buildup which reduces bulb life.

Fog Lamps

1. Access lamp through the lower fascia cutout.
2. Remove electrical connector from bulb.
3. Remove bulb from housing.

Rear Turn Signal And Backup Lamp

1. Remove the two push-pins from the taillamp housing.

Close-up of a car's front bumper and side panel, showing two arrows pointing to the rear panel (no text or symbols visible)

1. Grasp the taillamp and pull firmly to disengage the lamp from the aperture panel.

2. Twist and remove socket from lamp.

3. Remove bulb from socket and replace.

License Lamps

1. Use a screw driver to gently pry against the side of the snap tab to remove the lamp from the liftgate.

2. Rotate the socket 1/4 turn counterclockwise.

3. Pull bulb from socket.

Center High-Mounted Stoplamp

This light is an LED assembly. See your authorized dealer for replacement.

488 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

FLUID CAPACITIES

	U.S.Metric
Fuel(Approximate)13.6 Gallons 51.5 Liters
EngineOilwithFilter
2.0L and 2.4L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)	4.5 Quarts 4.26 Liters
CoolingSystem*
2.0L and 2.4L Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)	7.2 Quarts 6.8 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.

FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS

Engine

ComponentFluid,Lubricant,orGenuinePart
Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106.
Engine Oil We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
Fuel Selection 87 Octane

490 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Chassis

ComponentFluid,Lubricant,orGenuinePart
Automatic Transmission (CVT) – If Equipped We recommend	end you use MOPAR® CVTF+4® Continuously Variable Transmission Fluid.
Manual Transmission – If Equipped We recommend you	use MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) We recommend you use MOPAR® Gear & Axle Lubricant SAE 80W-90 API GL 5.
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) We recommend you use MOPAR® Gear & Axle Lubricant SAE 80W-90 API GL 5.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
Power Steering Reservoir	We recommend you useMOPAR® Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

CONTENTS

■ MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE .....492 □ Maintenance Chart.....494

492 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system. The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.

Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will influence when the "Change Oil" or "Oil Change Required" message is displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).

On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) equipped vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be displayed in the EVIC and a single chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.

On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, "Change Oil" will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.

Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or under “Instrument Cluster Description/Odometer/Trip Odometer” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months, whichever comes first.

OnceAMonthOrBeforeALongTrip:

• Check engine oil level
• Check windshield washer fluid level
• Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual wear or damage
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake master cylinder, power steering and fill as needed
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights

RequiredMaintenanceIntervals.

Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following page for the required maintenance intervals.

AtEveryOilChangeIntervalAsIndicatedByOil ChangeIndicatorSystem:

•Change oil and filter

•Rotate the tires. Rotateatthefirstsignofirregularwear,evenifitoccursbeforetheoilindicator systemturnson.

•Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required

•Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake

•Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses

•Inspect exhaust system

•Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions

Maintenance Chart

Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals.

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)	20,000	30,000	40,000	50,000	60,000	70,000	80,000	90,000	100,000	110,000	120,000	130,000	140,000	150,000
Or Years:	2 3 4	5 6 7 8	9 10	11 12	13 14	15
Or Kilometers:	32,000	48,000	64,000	80,000	96,000	112,000	128,000	144,000	160,000	176,000	192,000	208,000	224,000	240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints.	X		X		X		X		X		X		X
Inspectfrontsuspension,boot seals.tierodends,andreplace ifnecessary.	X		X		X			X		X		X		X
Inspectthebrakelinings,parking brakefunction.	X		X		X			X		X		X		X
Additional Maintenance
Replaceengineaircleanerfilter.XXXX	XX
Replaceairconditioning/cabinair filter.	X		X		X			X				X		X
Replacesparkplugs**		XXXXX
Flushandreplacetheengine coolantat10yearsor150,000 miles(240,000km)whichever comesfirst.									X					X
Replacereardriveassembly (RDA)fluid.					X						X

496 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)	20,000	30,000	40,000	50,000	60,000	70,000	80,000	90,000	100,000	110,000	120,000	130,000	140,000	150,000
Or Years:	2 3 4	5 6 7 8	9 10	11 12	13 14	15
Or Kilometers:	32,000	48,000	64,000	80,000	96,000	112,000	128,000	144,000	160,000	176,000	192,000	208,000	224,000	240,000
Replacepowertransferunit (PTU)fluid.					X						X
Changeautomatictransmission fluidandfilterifusingyourvehicleforanyofthefollowing:police,taxi,fleet,orfrequenttrailer towing.					X
Changetheautomatictransmissionfluidandfilter.											X

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 497

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)	20,000	30,000	40,000	50,000	60,000	70,000	80,000	90,000	100,000	110,000	120,000	130,000	140,000	150,000
Or Years:	2 3 4	5 6 7 8	9 10	11 12	13 14	15
Or Kilometers:	32,000	48,000	64,000	80,000	96,000	112,000	128,000	144,000	160,000	176,000	192,000	208,000	224,000	240,000
Changethemanualtransmission fluidifusingyourvehicleforany ofthefollowing:trailertowing, heavyloading,taxi,police,deliv-eryservice(commercialservice), off-road,desertoperationor morethan50%ofyourdrivingis atsustainedhighspeedsduring hotweather,above90°F(32°C).				X					X					X
InspectandreplacePCVvalveif necessary.									X

** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.

WARNING!

• Youcanbebadlyinjuredworkingonorarounda motorvehicle.Doonlyserviceworkforwhichyou havetheknowledgeandtherightequipment.If youhaveanydoubtaboutyourabilitytoperforma servicejob,takeyourvehicletoacompetentmechanic.
• Failuretoproperlyinspectandmaintainyourvehiclecouldresultinacomponentmalfunctionandeffectvehiclehandlingandperformance.This couldcauseanaccident.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

CONTENTS

■SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE....501

□Prepare For The Appointment....501

□Prepare A List....501

□Be Reasonable With Requests....501

■IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE....501

□FCA US LLC Customer Center .....502

□FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center .....503

□In Mexico contact:....503

□Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) .....503

□Service Contract....503

■WARRANTY INFORMATION....504

■ MOPAR® PARTS .....505

■REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS....505

□In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505

□In Canada....505

500 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

■PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS....506

■DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES....507

□Treadwear....507

□Traction Grades....507

□Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE

Prepare For The Appointment

If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's service history. This can often provide a clue to the current problem.

Prepare A List

Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the specific work you want done. If you've had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service advisor know.

Be Reasonable With Requests

If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many authorized dealer, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment.

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE

The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our products and services.

Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service. The manufacturer's authorized dealer have the

502 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner.

This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this process.

• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer. They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern, you may contact the manufacturer's customer center.

Any communication to the manufacturer's customer center should include the following information:

• Owner's name and address
• Owner's telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
  • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
  • Vehicle delivery date and mileage

FCA US LLC Customer Center

P.O. Box 21-8004

Auburn Hills, MI 48321-8004

Phone: [phone]

FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center

P.O. Box 1621

Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6

Phone: [phone] English / [phone] French

In Mexico contact:

In Mexico City: 5081-7568

Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300

Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)

To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 503

center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.

Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator.

Service Contract

You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer's service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer's service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you

504 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

have any questions about the service contract, call the manufacturer's Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).

The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer's service contract. It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer's service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer's service contract, and you require service after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents, and contact the person listed in those documents.

We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns.

WARNING!

Engineexhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, ormit, chemicals known to the State of Californiatocause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain product of component wear contain, ormit, chemicals known to the State of Californiatocause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.

WARRANTY INFORMATION

See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.

MOPAR® PARTS

MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy

campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your authorized dealer, and the manufacturer.

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

In Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS

To order the following manuals, you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call for an order form.

NOTE:A street address is required when ordering manuals (no P.O. Boxes).

ServiceManuals

These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.

DiagnosticProcedureManuals

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment.

Owner's Manuals

These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.

Call toll free at:

•1-800-890-4038(U.S.)
•1-800-387-1143(Canada)

Or

Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:

• www.techauthority.com

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES

The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire's manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle.

All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades.

Treadwear

The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction Grades

The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

508 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

WARNING!

Thetractiongradeassignedtothistireisbasedon straight-aheadbrakingtractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

Temperature Grades

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum required by law.

WARNING!

Thetemperaturegradeforthistireisestablished for atirethatisproperlyinflatedandnotoverloaded. Excessivespeed,under-inflation,orexcessiveloading,eitherseparatelyorincombination,cancause heatbuildupandpossibletirefailure.

INDEX

510 INDEX

ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) .....343

Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) .....463

Adding Fuel....394

Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458

Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

Airbag....62,72

Airbag Deployment 73

Airbag Light....70, 75, 100, 217

Airbag Maintenance 74

Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 69, 71, 72

Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) .....66, 69, 72

Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .452

Air Conditioner Maintenance .....454

Air Conditioning. 302

Air Conditioning Controls....302

Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314, 455

Air Conditioning, Operating Tips .....315

Air Conditioning Refrigerant .....454, 455

Air Conditioning System....302, 306, 454

Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Alarm Light....221

Alarm System (Security Alarm) 18

Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ..... 8

Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261, 289

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462, 488

Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488

Disposal....464

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)....343

Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ..... 1 8

Appearance Care....472

Assistance Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Automatic Dimming Mirror....109

Automatic Door Locks....33, 34

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .....306

Automatic Transaxle....12,418

Overheating....418

Automatic Transmission....327,469

INDEX 511

Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470

Fluid Level Check....470

Fluid Type....469

Gear Ranges....330

Special Additives....469

Autostick....335

Battery....452

Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) ..... 2 5

Belts, Seat 9 9

Body Mechanism Lubrication .....457

B-Pillar Location....364

Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490

Brake, Parking....340

Brakes....342

Brake System....342, 466

Anti-Lock (ABS)....343, 346

Master Cylinder....467

Parking....340

Warning Light....219

Brake/Transmission Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Bulb Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485, 486

Bulbs, Light .....102, 485

Calibration, Compass .....242

Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .....488

Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488

Caps, Filler

Fuel 394

Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443, 444, 451

Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Radiator (Coolant Pressure)....464

Carbon Monoxide Warning....98,394

Cargo Area Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Light.200

512 INDEX

Luggage Carrier....208

Cargo Light....200

Cargo Load Floor....203

Cargo Tie-Downs....204

Car Washes....473

Cellular Phone 112,3

Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487

Chains, Tire 379

Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418

Chart, Tire Sizing .....359

Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light)....446

Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ..... 98

Checks, Safety 98

Child Restraint 7

Child Safety Locks 35

Clean Air Gasoline....391

Cleaning

Wheels....475

Climate Control....302

Clock....246, 266, 277

Clutch....467

Clutch Fluid 467

Coin Holder....199

Cold Weather Operation....323

Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance .....301

Compact Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

Compass.230

Compass Calibration....242

Compass Variance. 242

Connector

U C I....292

Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) .....292

Console....199

Contract, Service .....503

Coolant (Antifreeze)....488

Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) .....464

Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461

INDEX 513

Adding Coolant (Antifreeze)....463

Coolant Level....461,465

Disposal of Used Coolant .....464

Drain, Flush, and Refill .....462

Inspection....465

Points to Remember....465

Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464

Radiator Cap 464

Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) .....462

Corrosion Protection....472

Cruise Light....222

Cupholders....199

Customer Assistance .....501

Data Recorder, Event 7 6

Dealer Service. 447

Defroster, Rear Window....207

Defroster, Windshield. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100, 304, 310

Delay (Intermittent) Wipers .....172

Diagnostic System, Onboard .....445

Dimmer Switch, Headlight. 167

Dipsticks Power Steering .339

Disposal Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .....464

Door Locks 30

Door Locks, Automatic....3 3

Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Downshifting....327

Driver's Seat Back Tilt....155

Driving 337

Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Electric Remote Mirrors....110

Electronic Brake Control System....346

Anti-Lock Brake System....346

Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

Electronic Roll Mitigation....347

514 INDEX

Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) .....175

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .....352

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)....232

Emergency, In Case of Jacking....418

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

Towing....437

Emission Control System Maintenance .....446

Engine. 443, 444

Air Cleaner 452

Block Heater....324

Break-In Recommendations....97

Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

Coolant (Antifreeze)....461

Cooling.461

Exhaust Gas Caution....98,394

Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

Oil 449,488

Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443, 444, 451

Oil Selection....450

Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

Overheating....416

Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Enhanced Accident Response Feature ..... 7 2

Ethanol....391

Event Data Recorder 7 6

Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 98, 394

Exhaust System....98,458

Exterior Lights....102

Filters

Air Cleaner....452

Air Conditioning....314, 455

Engine Oil .451

Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

INDEX 515

Flashers

Hazard Warning....416

Turn Signal....102, 217, 487

Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490

Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488

Fluid Leaks....102

Fluid Level Checks

Automatic Transmission....470

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461

Power Steering....339

Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts .....489

Fog Lights. 166, 228, 486

Folding Rear Seat....160

Folding Rear Seat (Sedan) .....160

Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416

Four Wheel Drive 337

Systems....337

Four Wheel Drive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434

Fuel. 390

Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

Additives....392

Capacity .488

Clean Air. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

Ethanol....391

Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

Gasoline....390

Gauge....216

Light.217

Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

Methanol....391

Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Requirements. 390

Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488

Fueling....394

Fuel System Caution....395

Fuses....480

Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®)....178

Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) .....394, 396, 445

Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

Gasoline (Fuel). 390, 488

Gasoline, Reformulated .....391

Gauges Coolant Temperature....221

Fuel 216

Odometer.224

Tachometer....219

Gear Ranges....330

Gear Select Lever Override....436

General Information....18, 143, 389

Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478

Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397, 399

GVWR....397

Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect®)....1 1 2

Hazard Warning Flasher .....416

Headlights....486

Cleaning 478

High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch .....167

Passing 168

Replacing....486

Switch....165

Head Restraints....157

Heated Mirrors....1 1 1

Heated Seats. 151

Heater 302

Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . .167

Hill Descent Control....230, 348

Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

INDEX 517

Hitches
Trailer Towing....402
HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) .....178
Hood Release....162
Ignition....1
K e y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition Key Removal 12
Immobilizer (Sentry Key)....1 5
Infant Restraint 77
Information Center, Vehicle .....232
Inside Rearview Mirror .....108
Instrument Cluster .....216
Instrument Panel and Controls .....214
Instrument Panel Cover....478
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning .....479
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) .....480
Interior Appearance Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Introduction 4
Jacking Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Jack Location....419
Jack Operation....418, 420
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Key-In Reminder 14
Keyless Entry System (Sedan) 20
Key, Programming....17
Key, Replacement....16
Keys 12
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) 15
Knee Bolster. 62
Lane Change and Turn Signals .....487
Lane Change Assist. 167

518 INDEX

Lap/Shoulder Belts. 4 4

Latches....102

Hood....162

Lead Free Gasoline....390

Leaks, Fluid .....102

Life of Tires....376

Liftgate (Sedan) 39

Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer....206

Light Bulbs....102,485

Lights....102,164

Airbag....70, 75, 100, 217

Alarm....221

Anti-Lock.218

Back-Up.487

Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

Brake Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Bulb Replacement 486

Cargo 200

Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487

Daytime Running....165

Dimmer Switch, Headlight .....164, 167

Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . . .355

Engine Temperature Warning .....219

Exterior....102

Fog 166,228,486

Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416

Headlights 165

Headlight Switch .....165

High Beam....167

High Beam Indicator....218

High Beam/Low Beam Select....167

Instrument Cluster .....165

License 487

Lights On Reminder....166

Low Fuel .217

Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) .....227

Map Reading....169

Oil Pressure....217

INDEX 519

Seat Belt Reminder .....218

Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) .....18, 221

Service....486

Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) .....221

Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) .....223

Traction Control....355

Turn Signal .....102, 164, 167, 487

Voltage....216

Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) .....216

Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397, 398

Capacities....398

Tires ....

Locks 30

Automatic Door 33

Child Protection 35

Door 30

Power Door 32

Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457

Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) .....208

Lumbar Support....154

Maintenance Free Battery....452

Maintenance Procedures .....448

Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492

Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine)....227, 446

Manual, Service ....506

Manual Transaxle Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471, 472 Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.36Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324, 471

Fluid Level Check 471

Frequency of Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471

Lubricant Selection .....471

Map/Reading Lights....169

Master Cylinder (Brakes) 467

Methanol....391

Mini-Trip Computer .....230

Mirrors....108
Automatic Dimming .....109
Electric Powered....1 1
Exterior Folding....1 1
Heated....1 1
Outside....1 1 0
Rearview....108
Vanity 1 1 2
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ..... 8
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Mopar Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447, 505
MTBE/ETBE....391
Multi-Function Control Lever. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
New Vehicle Break-In Period 97
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 69, 73
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 66, 69, 72
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Odometer. 224
Trip....223,224
Oil Change Indicator....235
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449, 488
Capacity 488
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Checking .449
Disposal....451
Filter 451
Filter Disposal .451
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Recommendation....450, 488
Synthetic....451
Viscosity .451
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) .....178

INDEX 521

Operating Precautions .....445
Operator Manual (Owner's Manual) 5
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222, 416
Owner's Manual (Operator Manual) ..... 5 , 5 0 6
Paint Care....472
Panic Alarm 2
Parking Brake. 340
Passing Light....168
Personal Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Pets. 9
Pets, Transporting. 96
Phone, Cellular 1 1
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect®)....1 1
Placard, Tire and Loading Information .....364
Power Door Locks 32
Mirrors 110
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) .....191
Steering....338,339
Sunroof....188
Transfer Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
5 Windows....36
Power Steering Fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Power Transfer Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts. 6 2
Preparation for Jacking....420
Pretensioners Seat Belts....5 5
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
(1) 2017年1月1日至2018年1月1日，公司与关联方累计发生的交易金额为人民币4,000万元。
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) .....464
Radio Operation....301
Rear Axle (Differential) .....471
Rear Drive Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Rear Liftgate (Sedan)....3 9
Rear Seat, Folding....160

Rearview Mirrors....108

Rear Window Defroster....207

Rear Window Features .....206

Rear Wiper/Washer....206

Recorder, Event Data 7 6

Recreational Towing....413

Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

Refrigerant....455

Reminder, Seat Belt. 6 0

Remote Control

Door Locks 20

Security Alarm....18

Remote Keyless Entry (Sedan) ..... 2 0

Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls .....299

Remote Starting System. 2 6

Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485

Replacement Keys 16

Replacement Parts. 447

Replacement Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505

Restraint, Head. 157

Restraints, Child. 7 7

Restraints, Occupant 40

Retractable Cargo Area Cover .....201

Roll Over Warning 4

Roof Type Carrier....208

Rotation, Tires .....379

Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 9 9

Safety Checks Outside Vehicle .....101

Safety Defects, Reporting .....505

Safety, Exhaust Gas. 9 8

Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

Safety Tips 98

Satellite Radio Antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261, 289

Schedule, Maintenance .....492

Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479

Seat Belt Reminder 60

INDEX 523

Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 99 Security Alarm (Theft Alarm). 1 8

Adjustable Shoulder Belt 49 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) 15

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . 4 9 Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 7

And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 2 Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 6

Child Restraint 77 Service Assistance .501

Extender....6 1 Service Contract....503

Front Seat 4 4 Service Manuals .506

Inspection....9 9 Settings, Personal....238

Pretensioners....5 5 Setting the Clock....246, 266, 277

Rear Seat 4 4 Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436

Untwisting Procedure 53 Shift Speeds, Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Seats....149 Shoulder Belts....4 4

Adjustment....149, 152 Side Airbag....71

Heated....151 Side Window Demisters (Defrosters)....313

Lumbar Support....154 Signals, Turn....102, 217, 487

Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

Rear Folding (Sedan)....160 Snow Tires....372

Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373, 374, 419

Tilting....155 Speed Control (Cruise Control)....175, 222

Speedometer. 217

Starting....321

Automatic Transmission....322

Cold Weather....323

Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Manual Transmission....321

Remote 26

Starting Procedures....321

Steering Power....338, 339

Tilt Column....174

Steering Wheel Audio Controls .....299

Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .299

Storage....484

Storage Bin....197

Storage, Vehicle. 313

Stuck, Freeing....434

Sun Roof....188

Sun Visor Extension....11 2

Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag ..... 6 2

Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

System, Remote Starting ..... 2 6

Tachometer. 219

Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) .....306

Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant .....221, 417

Theft Alarm (Security Alarm). 18

Theft System (Security Alarm)....18

Tie Down Hooks, Cargo .....204

Tilt Steering Column....174

Tire and Loading Information Placard. . . . . . . . . . . . 364

Tire Markings....357

Tires....101, 368, 507

Aging (Life of Tires) .....376

Air Pressure....368

Chains 379

Changing....418

Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

INDEX 525

General Information....368

High Speed....370

Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369

Jacking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418

Life of Tires....376

Load Capacity....364, 365

Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) .....380

Pressure Warning Light....223

Quality Grading....507

Radial....371

Replacement....377

Rotation....379

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357, 368

Sizes 359

Snow Tires....372

Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419

Spinning....375

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

Tread Wear Indicators .....376

Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

Towing....399

24-Hour Towing Assistance .....126

Disabled Vehicle....437

Guide....403

Recreational....413

Weight....403

Towing Assistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

Trailer Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

Cooling System Tips....412

Hitches....402

Minimum Requirements....405

Tips 411

Trailer and Tongue Weight....404

Wiring....409

Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

Trailer Weight. 403

INDEX

Transaxle

Automatic....1

Transmission

Automatic....327,469

Fluid 469

Manual....324

Transmitter Battery Service

(Remote Keyless Entry) 2 5

Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®)....178

Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

Trip Computer....230

Trip Odometer .....224

Trip Odometer Reset Button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Turn Signals....167, 217, 487

Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .292

Universal Transmitter .....178

Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 3

Vanity Mirrors....1 1 2

Variance, Compass .....242

Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ..... 7

Vehicle Loading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365, 397, 398

Vehicle Modifications/Alterations 8

Vehicle Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313, 484

Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm)....18

Voice Recognition System (VR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

UCI Connector .292

Uconnect® (Hands-Free Phone)....1 1

Understanding Your Instrument Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Uniform Tire Quality Grades .....507

Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . .216

2 Warning, Roll Over 4

Warnings and Cautions. 7

Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504

Washer

Adding Fluid 458

Washers, Windshield .....172

Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

Wheel and Wheel Trim....475

Wheel and Wheel Trim Care....475

Wind Buffeting....190

Window Fogging....313

Windows....36

Power....36

Windshield Defroster .....100, 304, 310

Windshield Washers....170, 172

Windshield Wiper Blades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457

Windshield Wipers....170

Wiper Blade Replacement....457

Wipers, Intermittent .....172

INSTALLATIONOFRADIOTRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT

Specialdesignconsiderationsareincorporatedinto this vehicle'selectronicsystemtoprovideimmunitytoradio frequencysignals.Mobiletwo-wayradiosandtelephone equipmentmustbeinstalledproperlybytrainedpersonnel.Thefollowingmustbeobservedduringinstallation.

The positive power connections should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. Then negative power connections should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. This connection should not be fused.

Antennasfortwo-wayradiosshouldbemountedonthe roofotherearareaofthevehicle.Careshouldbeused inmountingantennaswithmagnetbases.Magnetsmay affecttheaccuracyoroperationofthecompasson vehiclessoequipped.

Theantennacableshouldbeasshortaspracticaland routedawayfromthevehiclewiringwhenpossible.Use onlyfullyshieldedcoaxialcable.

Carefully match the antenna and cable to other radioto ensure a low standing wave ratio (SWR).

Mobileradioequipmentwithoutoutputpowergreaterthan normalmayrequirespecialprecautions.

Allinstallationsshouldbecheckedforpossibleinterferencebetweenthecommunicationsequipmentandthe vehicle'selectronicsystems.

Jeep®

SERVICE

STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS®

FCA US LLC

13MK49-126-AC Third Edition Printed in U.S.A.